Send a Quote from zzzEducation NWO

Your name:
Your email address:
Send to:
Comments:

10. Senator William Jenner, speaking in support of the Bricker Amendment, Congressional Record (1954) Today the path to total dictatorship in the United States can be laid by strictly legal means, unseen and unheard by Congress, the President, or the people. … We have a well-organized political-action group in this country, determined to destroy our Constitution and establish a one-party state. … [It has a] foothold within our Government, and its own propaganda apparatus. … One may call this group by many names. Some people call it socialism, some communism, some collectivism. I prefer to call it “democratic centralism.” … The important point to remember about this group is not its ideology, but its organization. It is a dynamic, aggressive, elite corps, forcing its way through every opening, to make a breach for a collectivist one-party state. It operates secretly, silently, continuously to transform our Government without our suspecting the change is under way. … This secret revolutionary corps understands well the power to influence the people … by an elegant form of brainwashing. … We see this, for example, in the innocent use of words like “democracy” in place of “representative government.” … It conducts tactical retreats but only the more surely to advance its own secret goal. … I know … of the Alger Hisses who planned it that way. … Dr. Wirt, of my state, told us in 1934 that the plans were all drawn, the timetable established. … The revolutionary cabal and its allies … designed the overall strategy. They broke the whole up into precisely measured parts and carefully timed moves, which appeared to be wholly unrelated. … Someone, somewhere, conceived the brilliant strategy of revolution by assembly line. The pattern for total revolution was divided into separate parts, each of them as innocent, safe and familiar looking as possible. But … when the parts of a design are carefully cut to exact size, to fit other parts with a perfect fit in the final assembly, the parts must be made according to a blueprint drawn up in exact detail. The men who make the blueprints know exactly what the final product is to be. … This assembly line revolution is like a time-bomb. … It is ready to go off, but it is not going to be set off until the time is ripe, until a switch is pulled. The switch is not to be pulled until the American people are conditioned or convinced that resistance is hopeless. 11. Marilyn Ferguson, member of the Association of Humanistic Psychology, the Association of Transpersonal Psychology, and is a member of the board of directors of the Institute of Noetic Science, The Open Conspiracy: Blue Prints for a World Revolution: The Aquarian Conspiracy (1980) While outlining a not-yet-titled book about the emerging social alternatives, I thought again about the peculiar form of this movement; its atypical leadership, the patient intensity of its adherents, their unlikely successes. It suddenly struck me that in their sharing of strategies, their linkage, and their recognition of each other by subtle signals, the participants were not merely cooperating with one another. They were in collusion. It—this movement—is a conspiracy! … There are legions of conspirators. They are in corporations, universities, and hospitals, on the faculties of public schools, in factories and doctors’ offices, in state and federal agencies, on city councils, and the White House staff, in state legislatures, in volunteer organizations, in virtually all arenas of policy making in the country. 12. William H. McIlhany, “Two Centuries of Intrigue,” The New American, vol. 12, no. 19 (Appleton: American Opinion Publishing Incorporated, 16 Sep. 1996), pp. 35–37 Down through the ages there have been many secret societies and conspiratorial movements that had as their goals the absolute overthrow of all existing governments, and the final destruction of all religion. … Adam Weishaupt, a professor of Canon Law at the University of Ingolstadt (in Bavaria, Germany) established a continuing organizational structure to direct the worldwide attack on religion and monarchy—a structure which would, he hoped, eventually rule the world. The organization Weishaupt founded on May 1, 1776 was called the Order of the Illuminati. Weishaupt planned for the Order to maintain publicly the image of a charitable and philanthropic organization. It was this image which attracted many German educators and Protestant clergymen to the Order. When they joined they were convinced that the goal of the Order was the purest form of Christianity, to make of all mankind “one happy and prosperous family.” Once enlisted as novices or “Minervals” in the Order, those who were prepared for deeper commitment were allowed to advance to the rank of Illuminatus Minor, where they were told that the only obstruction to the Order’s goal of universal happiness was the power being held by the religious and governmental institutions of the world. Accordingly, the leaders of these institutions—monarchs (or future monarchs) and clergymen—had either to be brought under the control of the Order or destroyed. If such a prospect frightened the new Illuminatus Minor, he was kept inactive at this level until his ethnical concepts were altered. As Weishaupt stated, “These [ruling] powers are despots when they do not conduct themselves by its [the Order’s] principles; and it is therefore our duty to surround them with its members, so that the profane may have no access to them. Thus we are able most powerfully to promote its [the Order’s] interests. If any person is more disposed to listen to Princes than to the Order, he is not fit for it, and must rise no higher. We must do our utmost to procure the advancement of Illuminati into all important civil offices.” After the candidate had proven his absolute devotion to the secrets of the Order, he was allowed to enter the top-level circle of initiates as an Illuminatus Major, just below the position of Rex held by Weishaupt. By now, all conventional idealism had been purged from the candidate and he was told about the real objectives of the Order: rule of the world, to be accomplished after the destruction of all existing governments and religions. He was now required to take an oath which bound his every thought and action, and his fate, to the administration of his superiors in the Order. But Weishaupt did not simply rely on the sincerity of his disciples. He set up an elaborate spy network so that all members would constantly be checking on the loyalty of each other. The secret police of the Order killed anyone who tried to inform the authorities about the conspiracy. This band was known as the “Insinuating Brethren” and had as its insignia an all-seeing eye. The structure of the Order was pyramidal, with Weishaupt at the top. Beneath him were two or three immediate subordinates, each of whom had three men under his orders; each of those three had several men who carried out his dictates; and so on. In their correspondence, Illuminists were required to use code names for themselves. Weishaupt called himself Spartacus; others were Cato, Marius, Brutus, Pythagoras, Socrates, and Hannibal. Weishaupt, who had been raised and educated by the Jesuits before rebelling against them, adopted much of the organizational system of the Jesuits for his Order. As a reward for selling himself totally to the Order, the top-level Illuminatus (of which there were few) was granted all the material and sensual benefits that could possibly be obtained. Weishaupt intended that “the power of the Order must be turned to the advantage of its members. All must be assisted. They must be preferred to all persons otherwise of equal merit. Money, services, honor, goods, and blood must be expended for the fully proved brethren.” This intricate conspiratorial structure among the economic, social, political, and cultural elite in Bavaria was tremendously successful: Within two years after the founding of the Order, all but two of the professorial chairs at the University of Ingolstadt were held by members of the Order. Furthermore, it is estimated that before 1789 there were at least 2,000 members of the Order in the German-speaking lands. many of these were ministers, lawyers, doctors, and even a few princes. None were members of the lower classes, the agricultural working masses, or the serfs. The influence of the Order on German education and the German clergy was devastating. By 1800 many German ministers no longer believed the basic tenets of Christian doctrine. They had been converted to the worship of “reason.” The original writings of the Order included detailed instructions for fomenting hatred and bloodshed between different racial, religious, and ethnic groups—and even between the sexes. The idea of promoting hatred between children and their parents was introduced. There were even instructions about the kinds of buildings to be burned in urban insurrections. In short, virtually every tactic employed by 20th-century subversives was planned and written down by Adam Weishaupt over 200 years ago. It was not until the summer of 1782 that the Order really began to grow in power and influence outside Bavaria. Having already contemplated the possibility of infiltrating the freemasonic bodies of Western Europe and then taking control of them, Weishaupt and his brilliant disciple, Baron Adolf von Knigge (Philo), at last had their chance. During that summer, leaders and delegates of the continental European freemasonic bodies met in a congress held in Wilhelmsbad. Acting as Weishaupt’s agent, von Knigge joined them and offered enticing promises of the secrets that the Illuminati had to offer. Von Knigge persuaded many of the German and French delegates to join Weishaupt’s movement, and they extended the influence of the Order into their individual lodges. The two leaders of German freemasonry, Duke Ferdinand of Brunswick and Prince Karl of Hesse, joined the Order, thus bringing the whole of German freemasonry under the control of the Illuminati. Another important new disciple was the French Count Honoré Gabriel Mirabeau, who was brought into the Order while in Germany and who was chosen to take Weishaupt’s system to France. Among Mirabeau’s most important recruits were the Duke of Orléans (Philippe Egalité), Brissot, Condercet, Savalette, Grégoire, Garat, Pétion, Babeuf, Barnave, Sieyes, Saint-Just, Desmoulins, Hébert, Santerre, Danton, Marat, Chenier, and just about every other leader in the impending French Revolution. … The French Revolution was not a spontaneous uprising of the oppressed masses. … The upheaval was not a chance event, but an orchestrated effort to create a new political order. The siege of the Bastille on July 14, 1789, an event which has been persistently misrepresented and romanticized, was an excellent example of how the Illuminati stage-managed the events of the French Revolution. … Not surprisingly, the clergy was singled out as an object of relentless persecution and eventual extermination. Churches were profaned and prostitutes were worshiped on their altars. The campaign to de-Christianize France included even the creation of a new calendar stripped of religious significance. Assaults were mounted against religious education, and the first conscription for military service was put into effect. The rule of civil government and authority in Paris dropped to an unprecedented low during the Reign of Terror which began in 1794. … Just before his execution in 1794, the Illuminist Robespierre, who had presided over much of the Terror, advocated the systematic extermination of 15 million Frenchmen so that the remaining food supplies would be adequate. Although this prototype ecological “depopulation” program was not fully implemented, the Terror did extinguish the lives of at least 3000,000 Frenchmen—297,000 of whom were members of the middle and lower agricultural and working classes. As always, the “people’s revolution” primarily victimized its alleged beneficiaries. … The U.S. was established as a constitutional republic in 1789, the same year the Illuminati’s devastation of France began. Shortly thereafter, agents of the Illuminati, such as French agitator Edward Genet, began organizing insurrectionary and secessionist movements to destroy the American Republic. There efforts were delayed by widespread public exposure, thanks in no small measure to George Washington, who condemned “the nefarious, and dangerous plan, and doctrines of the Illuminati....” Another memorable warning was offered in a July 4, 1799 address by Timothy Dwight, president of Yale College. By 1815, Weishaupt’s ambassadors had begun to extend their influence into many parts of the world beyond Bavaria and France. Among the personages and organizations responsible for extending the Illuminati’s infiltration and power throughout Europe were Filippo Michele Buonarroti and his Sublimes Maitres Parfaits (Sublime Perfect Masters), and Louis Auguste Blanqui and the Société des Saisons (Society of the Seasons). Those two branches of the Illuminati formed the source of the League of the Just, which commissioned Karl Marx to write the Communist Manifesto in 1848. Following publication of the Manifesto, the League of the Just changed its name to the Communist League. The Illuminists provided the unseen hand behind the staged communist revolts of 1848, which convulsed France, Austria-Hungary, and Russia. This inaugurated the era of communist subversion, infiltration, and control of governments across the globe—an era which has not ended, contrary to “polite” opinion. As James H. Billington, a respected scholar who is now the Librarian of Congress, illustrates in his exhaustively documented 1980 study Fire in the Minds of Men: The Origins of the Revolutionary Faith, it is from “Bavarian Illuminism” that “the modern revolutionary tradition” descends. Among the subversive and revolutionary 19th and early 20th century movements created by the Illuminati (primarily through European Grand Orient freemasonry, not British and American freemasonry) were the Marxian and “utopian” socialist movements; anarchism; syndicalism; Pan Slavism; Irish, Italian and German “nationalism”; German Imperialism; the Paris Commune; British “New Imperialism”; Fabian Socialism; and Leninist Bolshevism. 13. Timothy Dwight, President of Yale University, 4 July 1798, “The Duty of Americans, At the Present Crisis,” Political Sermons of the American Founding Era: 1730-1805, 2nd Edition (Indianapolis: Liberty Fund, 1998), vol. 2, part 5. Doctor Adam Weishaupt, professor of the canon law in the University of Ingolstadt, a city of Bavaria (in Germany) formed, about the year 1777, the order of Illuminati. This order is professedly a higher order of Masons, originated by himself, and grafted on ancient Masonic institutions. The secrecy, solemnity, mysticism, and correspondence of Masonry, were in this new order preserved and enhanced; while the ardor of innovation, the impatience of civil and moral restraints, and the aims against government, morals, and religion, were elevated, expanded, and rendered more systematical, malignant, and daring. In the societies of Illuminati doctrines were taught, which strike at the root of all human happiness and virtue; and every such doctrine was either expressly or implicitly involved in their system. The being of God was denied and ridiculed. Government was asserted to be a curse, and authority a mere usurpation. Civil society was declared to be the only apostasy of man. The possession of property was pronounced to be robbery. Chastity and natural affection were declared to be nothing more than groundless prejudices. Adultery, assassination, poisoning, and other crimes of the like infernal nature, were taught as lawful, and even as virtuous actions. To crown such a system of falsehood and horror all means were declared to be lawful, provided the end was good. In this last doctrine men are not only loosed from every bond, and from every duty; but from every inducement to perform any thing which is good, and, abstain from any thing which is evil; and are set upon each other, like a company of hellhounds to worry, rend, and destroy. Of the goodness of the end every man is to judge for himself; and most men, and all men who resemble the Illuminati, will pronounce every end to be good, which will gratify their inclinations. The great and good ends proposed by the Illuminati, as the ultimate objects of their union, are the overthrow of religion, government, and human society civil and domestic. These they pronounce to be so good, that murder, butchery, and war, however extended and dreadful, are declared by them to be completely justifiable, if necessary for these great purposes. With such an example in view, it will be in vain to hunt for ends, which can be evil. The names by which this society was enlarged, and its doctrines spread, were of every promising kind. With unremitted ardor and diligence the members insinuated themselves into every place of power and trust, and into every literary, political and friendly society; engrossed as much as possible the education of youth, especially of distinction; became licensers of the press, and directors of every literary journal; waylaid every foolish prince, every unprincipled civil officer, and every abandoned clergyman; entered boldly into the desk, and with unhallowed hands, and satanic lips, polluted the pages of God; enlisted in their service almost all the booksellers, and of course the printers, of Germany; inundated the country with books, replete with infidelity, irreligion, immorality, and obscenity; prohibited the printing, and prevented the sale, of books of the contrary character; decried and ridiculed them when published in spite of their efforts; panegyrized and trumpeted those of themselves and their coadjutors; and in a word made more numerous, more diversified, and more strenuous exertions, than an active imagination would have preconceived. To these exertions their success has been proportioned. Multitudes of the Germans, notwithstanding the gravity, steadiness, and sobriety of their national character, have become either partial or entire converts to these wretched doctrines; numerous societies have been established among them; the public faith and morals have been unhinged; and the political and religious affairs of that empire have assumed an aspect, which forebodes its total ruin. In France, also, Illuminatism has been eagerly and extensively adopted; and those men, who have had, successively, the chief direction of the public affairs of that country, have been members of this society. Societies have also been erected in Switzerland and Italy, and have contributed probably to the success of the French, and to the overthrow of religion and government, in those countries. Mentz was delivered up to Custine by the Illuminati; and that general appears to have been guillotined, because he declined to encourage the same treachery with respect to Manheim. Nor have England and Scotland escaped the contagion. Several societies have been erected in both of those countries. Nay in the private papers, seized in the custody of the leading members in Germany, several such societies are recorded as having been erected in America, before the year 1786. It is a remarkable fact, that a large proportion of the sentiments, here stated, have been publicly avowed and applauded in the French legislature. The being and providence of God have been repeatedly denied and ridiculed. Christ has been mocked with the grossest insult. Death, by a solemn legislative decree has been declared to be an eternal sleep. Marriage has been degraded to a farce, and the community, by the law of divorce, invited to universal prostitution. In the school of public instruction atheism is professedly taught; and at an audience before the legislature, Nov. 30, 1793, the head scholar declared, that he and his schoolfellows detested a God; a declaration received by the members with unbounded applause, and rewarded with the fraternal kiss of the president, and with the honors of the sitting. 14. Adam Weishaupt, founder of the Illuminati I am proud to be known to the world as the founder of the Illuminati. 15. George Washington, President of the Unites States, 24 Oct. 1798, Letter to Rev. G. W. Snyder, in The Writings of George Washington, vol. 20, p. 518 It was not my intention to doubt that the doctrines of the Illuminati and the principles of Jacobinism had not spread in the United States. On the contrary, no one is more satisfied of this fact than I am. 16. Joseph Willard, President of Harvard University, 4 July 1812, A Sermon Preached in Lancaster … on the Anniversary of Our National Independence … Before the Washington Benevolent Societies of Lancaster and Guildhall (Windsor, Vermont: Thomas M. Pomroy, 1812), pp. 14–15 There is sufficient evidence that a number of societies, of the Illuminati, have been established in this land of Gospel light and civil liberty, which were first organized from the grand society, in France. They are doubtless secretly striving to undermine all our ancient institutions, civil and sacred. These societies are closely leagued with those of the same Order, in Europe; they have all the same object in view. The enemies of all order are seeking our ruin. Should infidelity generally prevail, our independence would fall of course. Our republican government would be annihilated. 17. Winston S. Churchill, “Zionism versus Bolshevism,” Illustrated Sunday Herald, 8 Feb. 1920, p. 5 From the days of Spartacus-Weishaupt to those of Karl Marx, and down to Trotsky (Russia), Béla Kun (Hungary), Rosa Luxembourg (Germany), and Emma Goldman (United States), this world-wide conspiracy for the overthrow of civilization and for the reconstitution of society on the basis of arrested development, of envious malevolence, and impossible equality, has been steadily growing. It played, as a modern writer, Mrs. Webster, has so ably shown, a definitely recognizable part in the tragedy of the French Revolution. It has been the mainspring of every subversive movement during the Nineteenth Century; and now at last this band of extraordinary personalities from the underworld of the great cities of Europe and America have gripped the Russian people by the hair of their heads and have become practically the undisputed masters of that enormous empire. 18. Adam Weishaupt, founder of the Illuminati, quoted in John Robinson’s Proofs of a Conspiracy, 1795, reprinted by Western Islands, Boston, 1967, p. 112 The great strength of our Order lies in its concealment; let it never appear in any place in its own name, but always concealed by another name, and another occupation. None is fitter than the lower degrees of Freemasonry; the public is accustomed to it, expects little from it, and therefore takes little notice of it. Next to this, the form of a learned or literary society is best suited to our purpose, and had Freemasonry not existed, this cover would have been employed; and it may be much more than a cover, it may be a powerful engine in our hands. … A Literary Society is the most proper form for the introduction of our Order into any state where we are yet strangers. 19. J.D. Buck, 32nd degree Mason, The Genius of Freemasonry and the Twentieth Century Crusade (1940) If the sincere and thoughtful Mason would “take notice” of the symbolism and the use made everywhere in the Lodge of the word “Light,” and remember that the real Initiates are called also “the Illuminati.” 20. Adam Weishaupt, founder of the Illuminati For the Order wishes to be secret, and to work in silence, for thus it is better secured from the oppression of the ruling powers, and because this secrecy gives a greater zest to the whole. 21. Reed Smoot of the Quorum of the Twelve Apostles, in Conference Report, April 1933, p. 20 We are living in trying times—international struggles are imminent—”Nation rising against Nation” for supremacy and existence. Civilized governments are threatened by internal and destructive agencies in the form of Communism. This secret organization assumes different names and forms. It is Communism in France, Socialism in Germany, Internationalism in Spain and Italy, Nihilism in Russia, and similar sentiments and principles are cloaked under a variety of titles in America and Great Britain. All these organizations are opposed in spirit to all the restraints of law and order. Now let me call your attention to the fact that in February, 1831, Joseph Smith received a revelation on this very subject, which no doubt many of you are familiar with. Reference is also made along the same lines in the Book of Mormon. Secularism and infidelity are sweeping over the world; millions are indulging in every kind of iniquity. Crime is increasing with such rapidity that the large cities of the world find it next to impossible to cope with it. I know that it is easier to point out evils than the particular way of destroying them. I know it will take the united effort of honest, patriotic, liberty loving citizens, to meet the situation. The churches must play an important part. The Church of Jesus Christ has never ceased its opposition to organizations such as I have mentioned and never will. 22. John Taylor, President of the Church, 9 Oct. 1881, in Journal of Discourses, vol. 22, p. 297 We want nothing like communism, or nihilism, or any of the outrageous infamies that are beginning to vex and perplex the nations. Yet these things will roll on until it will be a vexation to hear the reports thereof, and unless this nation speedily turns round God’s hand will be upon them; unless the speedily adhere to the principles of equal rights and freedom, He will be after them. Now, you can set that down if you like and see whether it will come to pass or not. 23. Ezra Taft Benson of the Quorum of the Twelve Apostles, “Civic Standards for the Faithful Saints,” Ensign, vol. 2, no. 7 (Salt Lake City: The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, July 1972), pp. 60–61; the third paragraph did not appear in the Ensign or Conference Report, but can be found in the audio/video copy held at the Church Archives, a copy of which, I, the compiler, have in my possession Joseph Smith said that the Book of Mormon was the “keystone of our religion” and the “most correct” book on earth. (DHC, vol. 6, p. 56.) This most correct book on earth states that the downfall of two great American civilizations came as a result of secret conspiracies whose desire was to overthrow the freedom of the people. “And they have caused the destruction of this people of whom I am now speaking,” says Moroni, “and also the destruction of the people of Nephi.” (Eth. 8:21.) Now undoubtedly Moroni could have pointed out many factors that led to the destruction of the people, but he singled out the secret combinations, just as the Church today could point out many threats to peace, prosperity, and the spread of God’s work, but it has singled out the greatest threat as the godless conspiracy. There is no conspiracy theory in the Book of Mormon—it is a conspiracy fact. And along this line, I would highly recommend to you a new book entitled None Dare Call it Conspiracy, by Gary Allen. Then Moroni speaks to us in this day and says, “Wherefore, the Lord commandeth you, when ye shall see these things come among you that ye shall awake to a sense of your awful situation, because of this secret combination which shall be among you. …” (Eth. 8:24.) The Book of Mormon further warns that “whatsoever nation shall uphold such secret combinations, to get power and gain, until they shall spread over the nation, behold they shall be destroyed. …” (Eth. 8:22.) This scripture should alert us to what is ahead unless we repent, because there is no question but that as people of the free world, we are increasingly upholding many of the evils of the adversary today. By court edict godless conspirators can run for government office, teach in our schools, hold office in labor unions, work in our defense plants, serve n our merchant marines, etc. As a nation, we are helping to underwrite many evil revolutionaries in our country. Now we are assured that the Church will remain on the earth until the Lord comes again—but at what price? The Saints in the early days were established in Jackson County, but look at what their unfaithfulness cost them in bloodshed and delay. 24. Moses Thatcher of the Quorum of the Twelve Apostles, 16 June 1882, in an address in Franklin, Idaho, Franklin Ward Historical Record I have seen the end of this nation and it is terrible. … I will tell you in the name of the Lord that a secret band will sap the life of this nation. 25. Ezra Taft Benson of the Quorum of the Twelve Apostles, in Conference Report, October 1960, p. 104 The ancient American Prophet Moroni saw our day. Who can doubt that he had in mind the evils of godless communism when he gave this solemn warning: “Wherefore, O ye Gentiles, it is wisdom in God that these things should be shown unto you, that thereby ye may repent of your sins, and suffer not that these murderous combinations shall get above you, which are built up to get power and gain—and the work, yea, even the work of destruction come upon you, yea, even the sword of the justice of the Eternal God shall fall upon you, to your overthrow and destruction if ye shall suffer these things to be. “Wherefore, the Lord commandeth you, when ye shall see these things come among you that ye shall awake to a sense of your awful situation, because of this secret combination which shall be among you; or wo be unto it, because of the blood of them who have been slain; for they cry from the dust for vengeance upon it, and also upon those who built it up. “For it cometh to pass that whoso buildeth it up seeketh to overthrow the freedom of all lands, nations, and countries; and it bringeth to pass the destruction of all people, for it is built up by the devil, who is the father of all lies.” (Ether 8:23-25.) We are eminently justified in declaring that we should consider any attempt on the part of the communists to extend their system to any part of this hemisphere as dangerous to our peace and safety. 26. David O. McKay, President of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, in Conference Report, April 1962, p. 125 Men today are rapidly classifying themselves into two groups: believers and nonbelievers. J. Edgar Hoover, and I quote, says: “There is no place here in America for part-time patriots. This nation is face to face with the greatest danger ever to confront it, a sinister and deadly conspiracy which can be conquered only by an alert, informed citizenry. It is indeed appalling that some members of our society continue to deplore and criticize those who stress the communist danger. Public indifference to this threat is tantamount to national suicide. Lethargy leads only to disaster. Knowledge of the enemy, alertness to the danger, everyday patriotism are the brick and mortar with which we can build an impregnable fortress against communism.” 27. J. Edgar Hoover, Former Director of the F.B.I., in Elks Magazine (August 1956) We must now face the harsh truth that the objectives of communism are being steadily advanced because many of us do not recognize the means used to advance them. … The individual is handicapped by coming face to face with a Conspiracy so monstrous he cannot believe it exists. The American mind simply has not come to a realization of the evil which has been introduced into our midst 28. David O. McKay, President of the Church, in Conference Report, April 1966, pp. 109–110 The position of this Church on the subject of Communism has never changed. We consider it the greatest Satanical threat to peace, prosperity, and the spread of God’s work among men that exists on the face of the earth. 29. David O. McKay, President of the Church, in Conference Report, October 1959, pp. 4–9 On the fly-leaf of the book, The Naked Communist, by W. Cleon Skousen, we find this quotation, (and I admonish everybody to read that excellent book of Chief Skousen’s): “The conflict between communism and freedom is the problem of our time. It overshadows all other problems. This conflict mirrors our age, its toils, its tensions, its troubles, and its tasks. On the outcome of this conflict depends the future of mankind.” 30. Dr. Bella Dodd, former member of the National Committee of the U.S. Communist Party, in The Naked Capitalist (Salt Lake City, 1970), by W. Cleon Skousen I think the Communist conspiracy is merely a branch of a much bigger conspiracy! … I would certainly like to find out who is really running things. 31. Senator Joseph McCarthy, Speech delivered before the Senate, 14 June 1951, Congressional Record, 82d Cong. 1st sess. vol. 97, pt. 5, p. 6602. How can we account for our present situation unless we believe that men high in our government are concentrating to deliver us to disaster? This must be the product of a great conspiracy, a conspiracy on a scale so immense as to dwarf any previous such venture in the history of man. A conspiracy of infamy so black that, when it is finally exposed, its principals shall be forever deserving of the maledictions of all honest men. Who constitutes the highest circles of this conspiracy? About that we cannot be sure. We are convinced that Dean Acheson, who steadfastly serves the interests of nations other than his own, the friend of Alger Hiss, who supported him in his hour of retribution, who contributed to his defense fund, must be high on the roster. The President? He is their captive. … He is only dimly aware of what is going on. … What is the objective of the great conspiracy? I think it is clear from what has occurred and is now occurring: to diminish the United States in world affairs, to weaken us militarily, to confuse our spirit with talk of surrender in the Far East and to impair our will to resist evil. To what end? To the end that we shall be contained, frustrated and finally: fall victim to Soviet intrigue from within and Russian military might from without. 32. Ezra Taft Benson of the Quorum of the Twelve, “McCarthy in Retrospect,” Freemen Report Senator Joseph R. McCarthy, whom I knew and admired, was essentially correct in the claims he made about the Communist threat to America. His most vocal enemies hated and feared him, not because of what he could do to them, but because they knew he was telling the truth about them. Had he been wrong, he would likely have been ignored. He was not vilified because he “smeared innocent people,” but because he identified and exposed guilty ones. Fortunately, an increasing number of Americans now recognize that McCarthy was on the right track, and that our nation has suffered serious injury because we failed to heed his warning voice. At Senator McCarthy’s funeral, Dr. Frederick Brown Harris, the Chaplain of the Senate, asserted: “This fallen warrior through death speaketh, calling a nation of free men to be delivered from the complacency of a false security and from regarding those who loudly sound the trumpets of vigilance and alarm as mere disturbers of the peace.” Joseph McCarthy’s fight was the fight for America. That same fight is going on under even more trying circumstances today, and each of us owes it to our God, our family, and our country to preserve until victory is achieved. [signed] Ezra Taft Benson, Former Sec. of Agriculture 33. Loyd Wright, Former President of the American Bar Association, 20 Nov. 1961, BYU Speeches of the Year, 1961 It is ironical that the only nation which affirmatively expresses a dependence upon and belief in Almighty God in its birth certificate, should now be in mortal combat for its very existence with a godless conspiracy intent upon conquering the world, and reverting human society to the hazards and indignities of the Dark Ages. 34. Ezra Taft Benson of the Quorum of the Twelve Apostles, in Conference Report, October 1961, p. 69–72 Concerning the United States, the Lord revealed to his prophets that its greatest threat would be a vast, worldwide “secret combination” which would not only threaten the United States but also seek to “overthrow the freedom of all lands, nations, and countries.” (Ether 8:25.) … In connection with attack on the United States, the Lord told the Prophet Joseph Smith there would be an attempt to overthrow the country by destroying the Constitution. Joseph Smith predicted that the time would come when the Constitution would hang, as it were, by a thread, and at that time “this people will step forth and save it from the threatened destruction.” (Journal History, Brigham Young’s Speech, July 4, 1854.) … One of the most urgent, heart-stirring appeals made by Moroni as he closed the Book of Mormon was addressed to the gentile nations of the last days. He foresaw the rise of a great world-wide secret combination among the gentiles which “… seeketh to overthrow the freedom of all lands, nations, and countries; …” (Ether 8:25. Italics added.) He warned each gentile nation of the last days to purge itself of this gigantic criminal conspiracy which would seek to rule the world. The prophets, in our day, have continually warned us of these internal threats in our midst—that our greatest threat from socialistic-communism lies within our country. Brethren and sisters, we don’t need a prophet—we have one—we need a listening ear. And if we do not listen and heed, then, as the Doctrine and Covenants states, “… the day cometh that they who will not hear the voice of the Lord, neither the voice of his servants, neither give heed to the words of the prophets and apostles, shall be cut off from among the people.” (D&C 1:14.) The prophets have said that these threats are among us. The Prophet Moroni, viewing our day, said, “Wherefore the Lord commandeth you, when ye shall see these things come among you that ye shall awake to a sense of your awful situation.” (Ether 8:24.) Unfortunately our nation has not treated the socialistic-communist conspiracy as “treasonable to our free institutions,” as the First Presidency pointed out in a signed 1936 statement. If we continue to uphold communism by not making it treasonable, our land shall be destroyed, for the Lord has said that “… whatsoever nation shall uphold such secret combinations, to get power and gain, until they shall spread over the nation, behold they shall be destroyed; …” (Ibid., 8:22.) The Prophet Moroni described how the secret combination would take over a country and then fight the work of God, persecute the righteous, and murder those who resisted. Moroni therefore proceeded to describe the workings of the ancient “secret combinations” so that modern man could recognize this great political conspiracy in the last days: “Wherefore, O ye Gentiles, it is wisdom in God that these things should be shown unto you, that thereby ye may repent of your sins, and suffer not that these murderous combinations shall get above you, which are built up to get power and gain—and the work, yea, even the work of destruction come upon you. “Wherefore, the Lord commandeth you, when ye shall see these things come among you that ye shall awake to a sense of your awful situation, because of this secret combination which shall be among you; … “For it cometh to pass that whoso buildeth it up seeketh to overthrow the freedom of all lands, nations and countries; and it bringeth to pass the destruction of all people, for it is built up by the devil, who is the father of all lies; …” (Ibid., 8:23-25. Italics added.) The Prophet Moroni seemed greatly exercised lest in our day we might not be able to recognize the startling fact that the same secret societies which destroyed the Jaredites and decimated numerous kingdoms of both Nephites and Lamanites would be precisely the same form of criminal conspiracy which would rise up among the gentile nations in this day. The stratagems of the leaders of these societies are amazingly familiar to anyone who has studied the tactics of modern communist leaders. The Lord has declared that before the second coming of Christ it will be necessary to “… destroy the secret works of darkness, …” in order to preserve the land of Zion—the Americas. (2 Nephi 10:11-16.) The world-wide secret conspiracy which has risen up in our day to fulfill these prophecies is easily identified. President McKay has left no room for doubt as to what attitude Latter-day Saints should take toward the modern “secret combinations” of conspiratorial communism. In a lengthy statement on communism, he said: “… Latter-day Saints should have nothing to do with the secret combinations and groups antagonistic to the constitutional law of the land, which the Lord ‘suffered to be established,’ and which ‘should be maintained for the rights and protection of all flesh according to just and holy principles.’.” (Gospel Ideals, by David O. McKay, p. 306. Italics added.) … 35. John Taylor, President of the Church, 3 July 1881, Journal of Discourses, vol. 22, pp. 142–144 I am sorry to see this murderous influence prevailing throughout the world, and perhaps this may be a fitting occasion to refer to some of these matters. The manifestations of turbulence and uneasiness which prevail among the nations of the earth are truly lamentable. Well, have I anything to do with them? Nothing; but I cannot help but know that they exist. These feelings which tend to do away with all right, rule, and government, and correct principles are not from God, or many of them are not. This feeling of communism and nihilism, aimed at the overthrow of rulers and men in position and authority, arises from a spirit of diabolism, which is contrary to every principle of the Gospel of the Son of God. But then do not the Scriptures say that these things shall occur? Yes. Do not the scriptures say that men shall grow worse and worse, deceiving and being deceived? Yes. Do not the scriptures tell us that thrones shall be cast down and empires destroyed and the rule and government of the earth be trodden under foot? Yes. But I cannot help but sympathize with those who suffer from their influences; while these afflictions are the result of wickedness and corruption, yet we cannot shut our eyes to the fact that those who engage in these pernicious practices are exceedingly low, brutal, wicked and degraded. I would say “my soul come not thou into their secret; unto their assembly, mine honor, be not thou united.” … I feel more profoundly moved that deeds of this description can occur in a free, liberal and enlightened government like this. We might expect such things in some of the European nations where the principles of nihilism exist to so great an extent, and where there seems a disposition to subvert all rule and government and place the people and nations in the hands of irresponsible mobs, and of low, brutal, murderous men, without any regard to the principles of law, order, justice, equity and righteousness. I could account for some of these things taking place there. It is really astonishing to see what efforts are being made to accomplish the overthrow of rule and government in Russia, Austria, Germany, Spain, England, Italy, France, Turkey, etc. These things are beginning to spread among and permeate the nations of the earth. Do we expect them? Yes. These secret combinations were spoken of by Joseph Smith, years and years ago. I have heard him time and time again tell about them, and he stated that when these things began to take place the liberties of this nation would begin to be bartered away. We see many signs of weakness which we lament, and we would to God that our rulers would be men of righteousness, and that those who aspire to position would be guided by honorable feelings—to maintain inviolate the Constitution and operate in the interest, happiness, well-being, and protection of the whole community. But we see signs of weakness and vacillation. We see a policy being introduced to listen to the clamor of mobs and of unprincipled men who know not of what they speak, nor whereof they affirm, and when men begin to tear away with impunity one plank after another from our Constitution, by and by we shall find that we are struggling with the wreck and ruin of the system which the forefathers of this nation sought to establish in the interests of humanity. But it is for us still to sustain these glorious principles of liberty bequeathed by the founders of this nation, still to rally round the flag of the Union, still to maintain all correct principles, granting the utmost extent of liberty to all people of all grades and of all nations. If other people see fit to violate these sacred principles, we must uphold them in their entirety, in their purity, and be patriotic and law-abiding and act honorably toward our nation and to its rulers. 36. Marion G. Romney, Second Counselor in the First Presidency, “America’s Promise,” Ensign, vol. 9, no. 9 (Salt Lake City: The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, Sep. 1979), p. 5 Communism is the greatest anti-Christ power in the world today and therefore the greatest menace not only to our peace but to our preservation as a free people. By the extent to which we tolerate it, accommodate ourselves to it, permit ourselves to be encircled by its tentacles and drawn to it, to that extent we forfeit the protection of the God of this land. 37. Ezra Taft Benson, President of the Quorum of the Twelve Apostles, “Jesus Christ—Gifts and Expectations,” New Era, vol. 5, no. 5 (Salt Lake City: The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, May 1975), p. 19 And speaking of anti-Christ, if you want to get some idea of how we are flaunting the Constitution, see how the Constitution defines treason. Then observe what we are doing to build up the enemy, this totally anti-Christ conspiracy. If we continue on this tragic course of aid and trade to the enemy, the Lord has warned us of the consequences that will follow in chapter 8 of Ether in the Book of Mormon. 38. Ezra Taft Benson, letter to Elder Bremer, 1 Aug. 1972, copy in possession of the compiler. Responding to your letter of July 24, may I suggest that you acquire a copy of Brother Cleon Skousen’s book The Naked Capitalist which treats much this same field. Also the book The Great and Abominable Church of the Devil by Verlan Anderson. Both of these are available at the Deseret Book Company, I believe, and seem to substantiate in large measure what Gary Allen has said in None Dare Call it Conspiracy. 39. Ezra Taft Benson, 6 April 1972, as taken from the audio/video copy of his General Conference address, a copy of which was obtained by the compiler from the Archives of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints I would highly recommend to you a new book entitled None Dare Call it Conspiracy, by Gary Allen. 40. Gary Allen, None Dare Call It Conspiracy, p. 121 After the insiders have established the United Socialist States of America (in fact if not in name), the next step is the Great Merger of all nations of the world into a dictatorial world government. … The Insiders’ code word for the world superstate is “new world order,” a phrase often used by Richard Nixon. The Council on Foreign Relations states in its Study No. 7: “The U.S. must strive to: A. BUILD A NEW INTERNATIONAL ORDER.” … A world government has always been the object of the Communists. 41. Chester Ward, Rear Admiral and former Navy Judge Advocate, and C.F.R. member for 15 years The main purpose of the Council on Foreign Relations is promoting the disarmament of U.S. sovereignty and national independence and submergence into an all powerful, one world government. 42. Dr. Carroll Quigley, Professor of International Relations, Georgetown University Foreign Service School, Washington, D.C., in his book Tragedy and Hope The CFR [Council On Foreign Relations] is the American Branch of a society which originated in England and believes national directives should be obliterated and one-world rule established. I know of the operations of this network because I have studied it for twenty years, and was permitted in the early 1960’s to examine its papers and secret records. … I believe its role in history is significant enough to be known. 43. Excerpt from “A Memorial to be Addressed to the House of Bishops and the House of Clerical and Lay Deputies of the Protestant Episcopal Church in General Convention,” October 1940 The term “Internationalism” has been popularized in recent years to cover an interlocking financial, political, and economic world force for the purpose of establishing a World Government. Today Internationalism is heralded from pulpit and platform as a “League of Nations” or a “Federated Union” to which the United States must surrender a definite part of its National Sovereignty. The World Government plan is being advocated under such alluring names as the “New International Order,” “The New World Order,” “World Union Now,” “World Commonwealth of Nations,” “World Community,” etc. All the terms have the same objective; however, the line of approach may be religious or political according to the taste or training of the individual. 44. First Presidency Statement, in Conference Report, October 1942, p. 15 We condemn the outcome which wicked and designing men are now planning, namely: the worldwide establishment and perpetuation of some form of Communism on the one side, or of some form of Nazism or Fascism on the other. Each of these systems destroys liberty, wipes out free institutions, blots out free agency, stifles free press and free speech, crushes out freedom of religion and conscience. Free peoples cannot and do not survive under these systems. Free peoples the world over will view with horror the establishment of either Communism or Nazism as a worldwide system. Each system is fostered by those who deny the right and the ability of the common people to govern themselves. We proclaim that the common people have both this right and this ability. 45. Henry Kissinger, World Affairs Council Press Conference, Regent Beverly Wilshire Hotel, 19 April 1994 It cannot happen without U.S. participation, as we are the most significant single component. Yes, there will be a New World Order, and it will force the United States to change its perceptions. 46. Joseph Fielding Smith, in Conference Report, April 1950, p. 159 Now I tell you it is time the people of the United States were waking up with the understanding that if they don’t save the Constitution from the dangers that threaten it, we will have a change of government. 47. Robert Kennedy, former U.S. Attorney-General, 1967 All of us will ultimately be judged on the effort we have contributed to building a New World Order. 48. Nicholas Murray Butler, President of Columbia University, Nobel Peace Prize winner, nominee for Vice President in 1912, and president of the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, speaking in 1915 The old world order died with the setting of that day’s sun and a new world order is being born while I speak, with birth-pangs so terrible that it seems almost incredible that life could come out of such fearful suffering and such overwhelming sorrow. 49. H. G. Wells, The New World Order (1939) There may still be very great delays and disappointments before it becomes an efficient and beneficent world system. Countless people … will hate the new world order … and will die protesting against it. When we attempt to evaluate its promise, we have to bear in mind the distress of a generation or so of malcontents, many of them quite gallant and graceful-looking people. 50. Richard A. Falk, Professor of International Law and Practice at Princeton University, 1975 The existing order is breaking down at a very rapid rate, and the main uncertainty is whether mankind can exert a positive role in shaping a new world order or is doomed to await collapse in a passive posture. We believe a new order will be born no later than early in the next century and that the death throes of the old and the birth pangs of the new will be a testing time for the human species. 51. Nebraska State Senator Peter Hoagland, speaking on the Radio in 1983 with Everett Sileven, as quoted in The Federalist Digest, 26 Feb. 1999 Fundamental Bible-believing people do not have the right to indoctrinate their children in their religious beliefs, because we, the state, are preparing them for the year 2000, when America will be part of a one-world global society and their children will not fit in. 52. James Paul Warburg,, chairman of the C.F.R., before the U.S. Senate Foreign Relations Committee, Feb. 17, 1950 We shall have World Government, whether or not we like it. The only question is whether World Government will be achieved by conquest or consent. 53. Vladimir Ilich Lenin, 1918 I don’t care what becomes of Russia. To hell with it. All this is only the road to a World Revolution. 54. Adolf Hitler, in A History of National Socialism (1935), by Konrad Heiden Believe me, National Socialism would not be worth anything if it were to be confined to Germany and did not secure the rule of the superior race over the whole world for at least one or two thousand years. 55. J. Reuben Clark, Jr., in Deseret News, “Church Section,” 25 September 1949, pp. 2, 15 The plain and simple issue now facing us in America is freedom or slavery. … Our real enemies are communism and its running mate, socialism. … And never forget for one moment that communism and socialism are state slavery. World conquest has been, is now, and ever will be its ultimate goal. … One thing seems sure, we will not get out of our present difficulties without trouble, serious trouble. Indeed, it may well be that our government and its free institutions will not be preserved except at the price of life and blood. 56. Arthur Schlesinger, Jr., in Foreign Affairs, July/August 1995 We are not going to achieve a new world order without paying for it in blood as well as in words and money. 57. J. Reuben Clark, Jr., in Improvement Era, May 1944 I say unto you with all the soberness I can, that we stand in danger of losing our liberties, and that once lost, only blood will bring them back; and once lost, we of this church will, in order to keep the church going forward, have more sacrifices to make and more persecutions to endure than we have yet known, heavy as our sacrifices and grievous as our persecutions of the past have been. We face a war to the death, a gigantic worldwide struggle. We must face it, enter it, take part in it. In fact, we are all taking part in the struggle, whether we will or not. Upon its final issue, liberty lives or dies. 58. Louis T. McFadden, Congressman and Chairman of the Committee on Banking and Currency, 10 June 1932, in a speech to the House of Representatives, Congressional Record, pp. 12595–12603; see also Congressman Louis T. McFadden on the Federal Reserve Corporation: Remarks in Congress, 1934, reprinted by the Arizona Caucus Club, 1978 Mr. Chairman, we have in this Country one of the most corrupt institutions the world has ever known. I refer to the Federal Reserve Board and the Federal Reserve Banks, herinafter called the Fed. … This evil institution has impoverished and ruined the people of these United States, has bankrupted itself, and has practically bankrupted our Government. It has done this through the defects of the law under which it operates, through the maladministration of that law by the Fed and through the corrupt practices of the moneyed vultures who control it. Some people think that the Federal Reserve Banks are United States Government institutions. They are private monopolies which prey upon the people of these United States for the benefit of themselves and their foreign customers; foreign and domestic speculators and swindlers; and rich and predatory money lenders. In that dark crew of financial pirates there are those who would cut a man’s throat to get a dollar out of his pocket; there are those who send money into states to buy votes to control our legislatures; there are those who maintain International propaganda for the purpose of deceiving us into granting of new concessions which will permit them to cover up their past misdeeds and set again in motion their gigantic train of crime. These twelve private credit monopolies were deceitfully and disloyally foisted upon this Country by the bankers who came here from Europe and repaid us our hospitality by undermining our American institutions. Those bankers took money out of this Country to finance Japan in a war against Russia. They created a reign of terror in Russia with our money in order to help that war along. They instigated the separate peace between Germany and Russia, and thus drove a wedge between the Allies in the World War. They financed Trotsky’s passage from New York to Russia so that he might assist in the destruction of the Russian Empire. They fomented and instigated the Russian Revolution, and placed a large fund of American dollars at Trotsky’s disposal in one of their branch banks in Sweden so that through him Russian homes might be thoroughly broken up and Russian children flung far and wide from their natural protectors. They have since begun breaking up of American homes and the dispersal of American children. … The Wilson administration, under the tutelage of those sinister Wall Street figures who stood behind Colonel House, established here in our free Country the worm-eaten monarchical institution of the “King’s Bank” to control us from the top downward, and to shackle us from the cradle to the grave. … Every effort has been made by the Fed to conceal its powers—but the truth is—the Fed has usurped the Government. It controls everything here and it controls all of our foreign relations. It makes and breaks governments at will. No man and no body of men is more entrenched in power than the arrogant credit monopoly which operated the Fed. … Mr. Chairman, when the Fed was passed, the people of these United States did not perceive that a world system was being set up here … and that this country was to supply the financial power to an “international superstate.” A superstate controlled by international bankers, and international industrialists acting together to enslave the world for their own pleasure? 59. Louis T. McFadden, 9 March 1933, in his Speech to the House of Representatives, Congressional Record Mr. Chairman, I see no reason why citizens of the United States should be terrorized into surrendering their property to the International Bankers who own and control the Federal Reserve. 60. Louis T. McFadden It was not accidental [the 1929 stock-market “crash”]. It was a carefully contrived occurrence. … The international bankers sought to bring about a condition of despair here so that they might emerge as rulers of us all. 61. Charles A. Lindbergh, Sr., U.S. Senate, Nov. 1912 When the President signs this act [Federal Reserve Act of 1913], the invisible government by the money power—proven to exist by the Monetary Trust Investigation—will be legalized. The new law will create inflation whenever the trusts want inflation. From now on, depressions will be scientifically created. 62. Franklin D. Roosevelt, U.S. President, 1941 In politics, nothing happens by accident. If it happened, you can bet it was planned that way. 63. Congressman Wright Patman, Congressional Record (29 Sep. 1941) We have what is known as the Federal Reserve Bank System. That system is not owned by the Government. Many people think that it is because it says “Federal Reserve.” It belongs to private banks, private corporations. So we have farmed out to the Federal Reserve Banking System that which is owned exclusively, wholly, one hundred percent to the private banks—we have farmed out to them the privilege of issuing the Government’s money! 64. Robert Reich, former Secretary of Labor under Bill Clinton, in USA Today (7 January 1999) The dirty little secret is that both houses of Congress are irrelevant. … America’s domestic policy is now being run by Alan Greenspan and the Federal Reserve and America’s foreign policy is now being run by the International Monetary Fund. … When the president decides to go to war, he no longer needs a declaration of war from Congress. 65. William Lyon Mackenzie King, Prime Minister of Canada, 1935 Once a nation parts with the control of its currency and credit, it matters not who makes the nations laws. Usury, once in control, will wreck any nation. Until the control of the issue of currency and credit is restored to government and recognized as its most sacred responsibility, all talk of the sovereignty of parliament and of democracy is idle and futile. 66. Henry Ford, founder of Ford Motor Company It is well enough that people of the nation do not understand our banking and monetary system, for if they did, I believe there would be a revolution before tomorrow morning. 67. Andrew Jackson, U.S. President, to Congress in 1836, closing the second Federal Bank The bold effort the present [central] bank had made to control the government … are but premonitions of the fate that await the American people should they be deluded into a perpetuation of this institution or the establishment of another like it. 68. James Madison, 4th U.S. President History records that the money changers have used every form of abuse, intrigue, deceit, and violent means possible to maintain their control over governments by controlling the money and its issuance. 69. Horace Greeley, editor of the New York Tribune, who ran against Ulysses Grant for presidency, speaking in 1872 in reference to the National Bank Act of 1863 While boasting of our noble deeds we’re careful to conceal the ugly fact that by an iniquitous money system we have nationalized a system of oppression which, though more refined, is not less cruel than the old system of chattel slavery. 70. John Sherman, protégé of the Rothschild banking family, in a letter sent to New York bankers, Morton, and Gould, in support of the then proposed National Banking Act, 25 June 1863 The few who could understand the system will either be so interested in its profits, or so dependent on its favors, that there will be no opposition from that class, while on the other hand, the great body of the people mentally incapable of comprehending the tremendous advantage that capital derives from the system, will bear its burdens without complaint, and perhaps without even suspecting that the system is inimical to their interests. 71. Reginald McKenna, Secretary to the Treasury (1903), President of the Board of Education (1907–08) First Lord of the Admiralty (1908–1911), Home Secretary (1911–1915) and Chancellor of the Exchequer (1915–1916), and Chairman of the Midland Bank (1918), speaking in 1924. I am afraid the ordinary citizen will not like to be told that the banks can, and do, create money. … And they who control credit of the nation direct the policy of governments and hold in the hollow of their hands the destiny of the people. 72. Putting It Simply, a publication of the Boston Federal Reserve Bank When you or I write a check there must be sufficient funds in our account to cover the check, but when the Federal Reserve writes a check there is no bank deposit on which that check is drawn. When the Federal Reserve writes a check, it is creating money. 73. J. P. (John Pierpont) Morgan, one of America’s wealthiest financiers and international bankers, in a private communiqué to leading U.S. Bankers only, 1934 Capital must protect itself in every way. … Debts must be collected and loans and mortgages foreclosed as soon as possible. When through a process of law the common people have lost their homes, they will be more tractable and more easily governed by the strong arm of the law applied by the central power of leading financiers. People without homes will not quarrel with their leaders. This is well known among our principle men now engaged in forming an imperialism of capitalism to govern the world. By dividing the people we can get them to expend their energies in fighting over questions of no importance to us except as teachers of the common herd. 74. Major L. L. B. Angus The modern Banking system manufactures money out of nothing. The process is perhaps the most astounding piece of sleight-of-hand that was ever invented. Banks can in fact inflate, mint and unmint the modern ledger-entry currency. 75. Ralph M. Hawtrey, Former Secretary of the British Treasury Banks lend by creating credit. They create the means of payment out of nothing. 76. Josiah Charles Stamp, President of the Bank of England Banking was conceived in iniquity and was born in sin. The Bankers own the earth. Take it away from them, but leave them the power to create deposits, and with the flick of the pen they will create enough deposits to buy it back again. However, take it away from them, and all the great fortunes like mine will disappear and they ought to disappear, for this would be a happier and better world to live in. But, if you wish to remain the slaves of Bankers and pay the cost of your own slavery, let them continue to create deposits. 77. Thomas Jefferson, U.S. President, in a letter to Albert Gallatin, Secretary of the Treasury, 1802 If the American people ever allow private banks to control the issue of their money, first by inflation and then by deflation, the banks and corporations that grow up around them will deprive the people of their property until their children will wake up homeless on the continent their fathers conquered. 78. John Foster Dulles, former Secretary of State Somehow we find it hard to sell our values, namely that the rich should plunder the poor. 79. Andrew Jackson, U.S. President, in a letter to T. H. Colman, 26 April 1824 I am one of those who do not believe that a national debt is a national blessing, but rather a curse to a republic; inasmuch as it is calculated to raise around the administration a moneyed aristocracy dangerous to the liberties of the country. 80. Thomas Jefferson I believe that banking institutions are more dangerous to our liberties than standing armies. Already they have raised up a monied aristocracy that has set the government at defiance. The issuing power should be taken from the banks and restored to the people to whom it properly belongs. 81. John C. Calhoun, American statesman, 27 June 1836 A power has risen up in the government greater than the people themselves, consisting of many and various powerful interests, combined in one mass, and held together by the cohesive power of the vast surplus in banks. 82. John Adams All the perplexities, confusion and distress in America arise, not from defects in their Constitution or Confederation, not from want of honor or virtue, so much as from the downright ignorance of the nature of coin, credit and circulation. 83. Robert Hemphill, Credit Manager of Federal Reserve Bank, Atlanta, Ga. This is a staggering thought. We are completely dependent on the commercial Banks. Someone has to borrow every dollar we have in circulation, cash or credit. If the Banks create ample synthetic money we are prosperous; if not, we starve. We are absolutely without a permanent money system. When one gets a complete grasp of the picture, the tragic absurdity of our hopeless position is almost incredible, but there it is. It is the most important subject intelligent persons can investigate and reflect upon. It is so important that our present civilization may collapse unless it becomes widely understood and the defects remedied very soon. 84. Vladimir Ilich Lenin The surest way to destroy a nation is to debauch its currency. 85. Abraham Lincoln, shortly before his assassination I see in the near future a crisis approaching that unnerves me and causes me to tremble for the safety of my country; corporations have been enthroned, an era of corruption in High Places will follow, and the Money Power of the Country will endeavor to prolong its reign by working upon the prejudices of the People, until the wealth is aggregated in a few hands, and the Republic is destroyed. 86. President Franklin D. Roosevelt, in a letter written 21 Nov. 1933 to Colonel E. Mandell House The real truth of the matter is, as you and I know, that a financial element in the large centers has owned the government of the U.S. since the days of Andrew Jackson. 87. John Jay, American statesman and first Chief Justice of U.S. Supreme Court Those who own the country ought to govern it. 88. President Woodrow Wilson, speaking in 1916 in reference to signing the Federal Reserve Act in 1913 I am a most unhappy man. I have unwittingly ruined my country. A great industrial nation is controlled by its system of credit. Our system of credit is concentrated. The growth of the nation, therefore, and all our activities are in the hands of a few men. We have come to be one of the worst ruled, one of the most completely controlled and dominated Governments in the civilized world—no longer a Government by free opinion, no longer a Government by conviction and the vote of the majority, but a Government by the opinion and duress of a small group of dominant men. 89. Dr. David Korten, founder of the People-Centered Development Forum Democracy is based on the principle of one person, one vote. The market functions on the principle of one dollar, one vote. Consequently, under conditions of unequal economic power, a society ruled by the market is a society ruled by those who have the most money—the antithesis of democracy. 90. Louis Brandeis, U.S. Supreme Court Justice We can have democracy in this country, or we can have great wealth concentrated in the hands of a few, but we can’t have both. 91. Archibald E. Roberts, Lt.Col. AUS, ret., Committee to Restore the Constitution, testimony at a public hearing, Wisconsin State Legislature’s House of Representatives, Why America is Bankrupt, 1971 A significant portion of the American public is yet to become aware of the “Invisible Government of Monetary Power,” although this knowledge is common in Europe. Americans still believe that they are working toward a better way of life. Surreptitiously, however, social customs and forms of administration in the United States are being carefully and gradually modified. The change from one type of culture to another is thus accomplished without arousing serious public challenge.¼ The stark truth is that America is now passing from a Constitutional Republic into a totalitarian, world-wide government. World dominion is the ages-old dream of the mattoids who have mastered the science of control over people. Their success in the United States is directly related to two central issues: (1) transfer of money control from the people into the hands of an international banking combine, and (2) creation of a complex and confusing judicial system designed to frustrate justice. 92. Ramsey Clark, former U.S. Attorney General, interview in The Sun, August 2001 But we’re not a democracy. It’s a terrible misunderstanding and a slander to the idea of democracy to call us that. In reality, we’re a plutocracy: a government by the wealthy. 93. Professor Carroll Quigley, Tragedy and Hope: A History of the World in Our Time (1966) For the first time in its history, Western Civilization is in danger of being destroyed internally by a corrupt, criminal ruling cabal which is centered around the Rockefeller interests, which include elements from the Morgan, Brown, Rothschild, Du Pont, Harriman, Kuhn-Loeb, and other groupings as well. This junta took control of the political, financial, and cultural life of America in the first two decades of the twentieth century. 94. Paul the Apostle, in his first epistle to Timothy, chapter 6, verse 9–10, Holy Bible (King James Version); emphasis added They that will be rich fall into temptation and a snare, and into many foolish and hurtful lusts, which drown men in destruction and perdition. For the love of money is the root of all evil. 95. American Mercury Magazine, December 1957, p. 92 The invisible Money Power is working to control and enslave mankind. It financed Communism, Fascism, Marxism, Zionism, Socialism. All of these are directed to making the United States a member of a World government. 96. David Rockefeller, at Trilateral Commission Meeting, June 1991 We are grateful to the Washington Post, the New York Times,Time Magazine and other great publications whose directors have attended our meetings and respected the promises of discretion for almost forty years. It would have been impossible for us to develop our plan for the world if we had been subject to the bright lights of publicity during those years. But, the world is now more sophisticated and prepared to march towards a world-government. The supranational sovereignty of an intellectual elite and world bankers is surely preferable to the national autodetermination practiced in past centuries. 97. Larry P. McDonald, U.S. Congressman, 1976, killed in the Korean Airlines 747 that was shot down by the Soviets, in “Introduction” to The Rockefeller File, by Gary Allen (1975) The drive of the Rockefellers and their allies is to create a one-world government combining supercapitalism and Communism under the same tent, all under their control. … Do I mean conspiracy? Yes I do. I am convinced there is such a plot, international in scope, generations old in planning, and incredibly evil in intent. 98. Aleksandr Solzhenitsyn, famed Russian author, lecturer, historian, intellectual, and recipient of a Nobel Prize, speaking in the Ballroom of the Hilton in Washington, D.C., on June 30, 1975 There also exists another alliance—at first glance a strange one, a surprising one—but if you think about it, in fact, one which is well grounded and easy to understand. This is the alliance between our Communist leaders and your capitalists. This alliance is not new. … We observe continuous and steady support by the businessmen of the West of the Soviet Communist leaders. 99. Dr. Harold Pease, Ph.D., Professor of History at Palo Verde College, and former advisor to the Constitutional Subcommittee of the Judiciary Committee of the U.S. Senate, The Communist-Capitalist Alliance Those of us who teach political science on the college and university level find ourselves seriously handicapped by the lack of textbooks and carefully prepared historical research on one of the most important phenomena of our time, namely, the amazing alliance which has been growing for more than half a century between the leaders of the world-wide Communist movement and the leaders of some of the most powerful banks and industries of Europe and America. That such an alliance should even exist, came as an intellectual shock to this writer. It seemed irrational, an ideological contraction, a conflict of interests. Nevertheless, the more I have researched the matter, the more convinced I have become that the alliance is not only a reality, but that also herein might be found the Gordian knot which must be cut before we can solve some of the world’s most critical problems. 100. Congressman Louis T. McFadden, Chairman, House Banking Committee, 1933 Open the books … and you will be staggered to see how much American money has been taken from the United States Treasury for the benefit of Russia. Find out what business has been transacted for the State Bank of Soviet Russia, by its correspondent, the Chase Bank of New York. 101. Chicago Tribune article, published September 1964 David Rockefeller, President of Chase Manhattan Bank, briefed President Johnson today on his recent meeting with Premier Nikita Khrushchev of Russia. 102. Vladimir Ilich Lenin, Bolshevik leader and mass murderer of millions of Russians, 1921 Behind the October Revolution there are more influential personalities than the thinkers and executors of Marxism. 103. David Rockefeller’s message of congratulations to the Communist tyrants in the Kremlin, 1977 My congratulations on the occasion of the 60th anniversary of the October Revolution. 104. W. Cleon Skousen, The Naked Capitalist (Salt Lake City, 1970), pp. 40–41 Of course, members of the dynastic banking families had been financing the Russian-oriented revolutionists for many years. Trotsky, in his biography, refers to some of these loans from British financiers going back as far as 1907. By 1917 the major subsidies for the revolution were being arranged by Sir George Buchanan and Lord Alfred Milner (of the Morgan-Rothschild-Rhodes confederacy). Milner, it will be recalled, was the founder of England’s secret “Round Table” group which started the Royal Institute for International Affairs in England and the Council on Foreign Relations in the United States. One American source gave Trotsky, Lenin and the other Communist leaders around twenty million dollars for the final triumph of Bolshevism in Russia. This was Jacob Schiff of Kuhn, Loeb and Company. 105. Baron Nathan Mayer de Rothschild (1777-1836) I care not what puppet is placed on the throne of England to rule the Empire, … The man that controls Britain’s money supply controls the British Empire. And I control the money supply. 106. James A. Garfield, former U.S. President Whoever controls the volume of money in any country is absolute master of all industry and commerce. 107. Chicago Evening American, 3 December 1923 The Rothschilds can start or prevent wars. Their word could make or break empires. 108. Mayer Amschel Rothschild, in The Creature from Jekyll Island (American Opinion Publishing), p. 218 Let me issue and control a nation’s money and I care not who writes the laws. 109. John Todd of the Masonic Council of Thirteen, Progress (January 1991) The Rothschild family is the head of the organization in which I entered in Colorado. All the Occult Brotherhoods are part of it. It is a Lucifer Organization to install his reign in the whole world. … Supposedly the Rothschilds have personal dealings with the Devil. I have personally been in his villa and have experienced it. And I know it is true. 110. Professor Revilo P. Oliver, Conspiracy or Degeneracy? A theory that a conspiracy has been working consciously for many centuries is not very plausible unless one attributes to them a religious unity. That is tantamount to regarding them as Satanists engaged in the worship and service of supernatural evil. The directors of the conspiracy must see or otherwise directly perceive manifestations which convince them of the existence and power of Lucifer. And since subtle conspirators must be very shrewd men, not likely to be deceived by auto-suggestion, hypnosis, or drugs, we should have to conclude that they probably are in contact with a force of pure evil. 111. David Spangler, on the Board of Directors of Planetary Citizens, United Nations, “Reflections on the Christ,” quoted in Unicorn in the Sanctuary, by Randy England, 1978 Lucifer comes to give us the final … Luciferic initiation … that many people now and in the days ahead, will be facing—for it is an initiation into the New Age. … No one will enter the New World Order unless he or she will make a pledge to worship Lucifer. No one will enter the New Age unless he will take a Luciferian initiation. 112. Manley P. Hall, The Lost Keys of Freemasonry, p. 124 When the Mason learns that the key to the warrior on the block is the proper application of the dynamo of living power, he has learned the mystery of his Craft. The seething energies of Lucifer are in his hands, and before he may step onward and upward, he must prove his ability to properly apply energy. He must follow in the footsteps of his forefather, Tubal-Cain, who with the mighty strength of the war god hammered his sword into a plowshare. 113. Albert Pike, Confederate General, 33rd Degree Mason and Sovereign Pontiff of Universal Freemasonry, 14 July 1889, in an address to the 23 Confederated Supreme Councils of the World, quoted in Woman and Child in Universal Freemasonry (Paris & Lyon: Delhomme & Briguet, Editeurs, 1894), pp. 587–589, translated by Eric Serejski; see also Occult Theocrasy (1933), 2 vols., reprint (Hawthorne, California: The Christian Book Club of America. 1980), p. 233 What we must say to the crowd is:—We worship a God, but it is the God that one worships without superstition. To you, Sovereign Grand Inspectors General, we say, so that you can repeat it to the Brethren of the 32nd, 31st and 30th degrees: —The Masonic religion must be, by all of us initiates of the high grades, maintained in the purity of the Luciferian doctrine. If Lucifer were not God, Adonai (the God of the Christians) whose deeds prove his cruelty, perfidy and hatred of man, his barbarism and repulsion of science—if Lucifer were not God, would Adonai and his priests slander him? Yes, Lucifer is God, and unfortunately so is Adonai. For the eternal law is that there is no splendor without shadow, no beauty without ugliness, no white without black, because the absolute can only exist as two, because darkness is necessary to light to serve as its compliment, as the pedestal is necessary to the statue, as the brake to the locomotive. … The true and pure philosophical religion is the belief in Lucifer, equal to Adonai, but Lucifer, God of Light and God of Good, is fighting for humanity against Adonai, God of Darkness and God of Evil. 114. “The Hierarchy of Light,” a pamphlet published by Lucist Trust (formerly Lucifer Publishing Company), which currently has offices in the United Nations headquarters building, and of which Robert Mueller, former Assistant Secretary General of the U.N., is a member, as taken from their web site, http://www.lucistrust.org/epamphlets/hol.shtml (8 Mar. 2006) Throughout time, the idea of a group of wise and enlightened beings working behind the scenes to guide our planet has been conveyed in spiritual teachings, in literature and myth. This group, known by various names such as the spiritual Hierarchy, the Masters of the Wisdom, and the Elder Brothers has ever come forth in times of crisis and today will be no different. … They work primarily behind the scenes, protected in the remote areas of Earth, and it is futile, therefore, to seek them out upon the physical plane. They are individuals of extraordinary capacities. … The Hierarchy works ceaselessly and could be compared to a great army working for world upliftment. They are the inspiration for the major changes being implemented in the world yet they take no credit for the work that they do. Through the process of spiritual impression they influence those leaders and progressive thinkers whose minds and hearts are receptive to the new and forward looking, incoming ideas. Their work extends to all aspects of our planetary life—politics, education, religion, art, science, psychology and economics. … There are periods of major opportunity of which the Hierarchy takes advantage and this present period is one of major opportunity. In the coming decades members of the Hierarchy will begin the process of externalization, moving outward onto the physical plane. They will again walk among humanity to help usher in the new age and prepare human consciousness for the reappearance of the World Teacher. This externalization process will cause tremendous changes. Because of the Hierarchy’s enlightened leadership, the course of human affairs will be irrevocably turned towards the light and towards the realization of the divine Plan. 115. Benjamin Disraeli, British Prime Minister, 1876 The governments of the present day have to deal not merely with other governments, with emperors, kings and ministers, but also with the secret societies which have everywhere their unscrupulous agents, and can at the last moment upset all the governments’ plans. 116. Woodrow Wilson, The New Freedom (1913) Since I entered politics, I have chiefly had men’s views confided to me privately. Some of the biggest men in the United States, in the Field of commerce and manufacture, are afraid of something. They know that there is a power somewhere so organized, so subtle, so watchful, so interlocked, so complete, so pervasive, that they better not speak above their breath when they speak in condemnation of it. 117. Justice Felix Frankfurter, U.S. Supreme Court The real rulers in Washington are invisible and exercise their powers from behind the scenes. 118. Benjamin Disraeli, former Prime Minister of England Governments do not govern, but merely control the machinery of government, being themselves controlled by the hidden hand. 119. J. Reuben Clark, Jr., in Conference Report, October 1941, p. 16 I have been preaching against Communism for twenty years. I still warn you against it, and I tell you that we are drifting toward it more rapidly than some of us understand and I tell you that when Communism comes, the ownership of the things which are necessary to feed your families is going to be taken away from us. I tell you freedom of speech will go, freedom of the press will go, and freedom of religion will go. I have warned you against propaganda and hate. We are in the midst of the greatest exhibition of propaganda that the world has ever seen, and all directed toward one end. Just do not believe all you read. 120. Ambrose Bierce, American writer, 1842-1914 History is an account mostly false, of events mostly unimportant, which are brought about by rulers, mostly knaves, and soldiers, mostly fools. 121. Edward Said, a well-known literary theorist, critic and outspoken Palestinian activist History is written by those who win and those who dominate. 122. Francois Voltaire, French writer, deist and philosopher, 1694-1778 History is fables agreed upon. 123. Honoré de Balzac, a French novelist There are two histories : official history, lying, and then secret history, where you find the real causes of events. 124. George Orwell, novelist and political and cultural commentator Who controls the past controls the future. Who controls the present controls the past. 125. Schuyler Ebbets, “The 2004 Election Has Already Been Rigged,” posted on www.thepeoplesvoice.org, 2 Sep. 2003 The pollsters have recently been forced to admit that the majority of Americans are against the re-election of George Bush. Two wars, thousands of dead human beings, and nine million lost jobs later and people are beginning to realize that something is very wrong. In spite of this gradual awakening most registered voters continue to depend on TV for their news and they are kept woefully in the dark about issues like election reform and touch screen voting. The media has gone to great lengths to foster an illusion of legitimacy and normalcy surrounding the electoral process. People have been intentionally lead to believe that their vote counts and Bush could actually be booted out of office on Election Day. No way is Bush going to lose, it just can’t happen. The 2004 election has already been rigged. The corporations and the military industrial complex have bought them selves a government and they aren’t going to let some silly little presidential election jeopardize their investment. 126. Joseph Stalin, former dictator of communist Russia It’s not who votes that counts. It’s who counts the votes. 127. Emma Goldman, an “anarcho-communist” who has been lionized as an iconic “rebel woman” feminist If voting changed anything, they would make it illegal. 128. Oscar Callaway, U.S. Congressman, Congressional Record (1917) In March, 1915, the J.P. Morgan interests, the steel, shipbuilding, and powder interest, and their subsidiary organizations, got together 12 men high up in the newspaper world and employed them to select the most influential newspapers in the United States and sufficient number of them to control generally the policy of the daily press. … They found it was only necessary to purchase the control of 25 of the greatest papers. An agreement was reached; the policy of the papers was bought, to be paid for by the month; an editor was furnished for each paper to properly supervise and edit information regarding the questions of preparedness, militarism, financial policies, and other things of national and international nature considered vital to the interests of the purchasers. 129. Spiro Agnew, U. S. Vice-President, 13 November 1969 The American people should be made aware of the trend toward monopolization of the great public information vehicles and the concentration of more and more power over public opinion in fewer and fewer hands. 130. Gore Vidal, novelist, essayist, playwright, and provocateur The corporate grip on opinion in the United States is one of the wonders of the Western world. No First World country has ever managed to eliminate so entirely from its media all objectivity—much less dissent. 131. U.S. Rep. Bernie Sanders, “Congress Can No Longer Ignore Corporate Control of the Media,” The Hill (12 June 2002) One of our best-kept secrets is the degree to which a handful of huge corporations control the flow of information in the United States. Whether it is television, radio, newspapers, magazines, books or the Internet, a few giant conglomerates are determining what we see, hear and read. And the situation is likely to become much worse as a result of radical deregulation efforts by the Bush administration and some horrendous court decisions. Television is the means by which most Americans get their “news.” Without exception, every major network is owned by a huge conglomerate that has enormous conflicts of interest. … The bottom line is that fewer and fewer huge conglomerates are controlling virtually everything that the ordinary American sees, hears and reads. This is an issue that Congress can no longer ignore. 132. William Colby, former Director of the CIA, in Derailing Democracy: The America the Media Don’t Want You to See (2000), by Dave McGowan The Central Intelligence Agency owns everyone of any significance in the major media. 133. Garry Allen, None Dare Call it Conspiracy, p. 7 We believe the picture painters of the mass media are artfully creating landscapes for us which deliberately hide the real picture. In this book we will show you how to discover the “hidden picture” in the landscapes presented to us daily through newspapers, radio and television. 134. Ezra Taft Benson, President of the Quorum of the Twelve, BYU Address entitled “In His Steps,” 4 March 1979 The less newspapers have to say of value and of truth, the more pages they seem to take to say it. Usually a few minutes is more than sufficient to read a paper. One must select wisely a source of news; otherwise it would be better to be uninformed than misinformed. The subscribers of some mass magazines and newspapers are ever reading but seldom able to come to a knowledge of the truth in the areas of most vital concern. 135. Noam Chomsky, Institute Professor Emeritus of Linguistics at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology Any dictator would admire the uniformity and obedience of the [U.S.] media 136. Thomas Jefferson The man who reads nothing at all is better educated than the man who reads nothing but newspapers. 137. Ernest Bevin, British Foreign Minister, at London Conference of Foreign Ministers, 10 Feb. 1946, quoted in The Barnes Review, vol. 5, no. 3 (Washington D.C.: TBR Co., May/June 1999), p. 29 A newspaper has three things to do. One is to amuse, another is to entertain and the rest is to mislead. 138. John Swinton, Chief of Staff for the New York Times, at New York Press Club, 1953, in A U.S. Police Action: Operation Vampire Killer, The American Citizens and Lawmen Association, pp. 18–19 There is no such thing, at this date of the world’s history, in America, as an independent press. You know it, and I know it. There is not one of you who dares to write your honest opinions, and if you did, you know beforehand that it would never appear in print. I am paid weekly for keeping my honest opinion out of the paper I am connected with. Others of you are paid similar salaries for similar things, and any of you who would be so foolish as to write honest opinions would be out on the streets looking for another job. If I allowed my honest opinions to appear in one issue of my newspaper, before twenty-four hours my occupation would be gone. The business of the journalists is to destroy the truth; to lie outright; to pervert; to vilify; to fawn at the feet of mammon, and to sell his country and his race for his daily bread. You know it, and I know it and what folly is this toasting an independent press? We are the tools and vassals of rich men behind the scenes. We are the jumping jacks, they pull the strings and we dance. Our talents, our possibilities and our lives are all the property of other men. We are intellectual prostitutes. 139. Robert McChesney, Research Professor in the Institute of Communications Research and the Graduate School of Library and Information Science at the University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign The notion that journalism can regularly produce a product that violates the fundamental interests of media owners and advertisers … is absurd. 140. William Shirer, who lived in Nazi Germany throughout most of the 1930s, and wrote about it in The Rise and Fall of the Third Reich (1959) I myself was to experience how easily one is taken in by a lying and censored press and radio in a totalitarian state. … Though unlike most Germans I had daily access to foreign newspapers … and though I listened regularly to the BBC and other foreign broadcasts, my job necessitated the spending of many hours a day in combing the German press, checking the German radio, conferring with Nazi officials and going to party meetings. It was surprising and sometimes consternating to find that notwithstanding the opportunities I had to learn the facts and despite one’s inherent distrust of what one learned from Nazi sources, a steady diet over the years of falsifications and distortions made a certain impression on one’s mind and often misled it. … I would meet with the most outlandish assertions from seemingly educated and intelligent persons. It was obvious they were parroting some piece of nonsense they had heard on the radio or read in the newspapers. … Sometimes one was tempted to say as much, but on such occasions one was met with such a stare of incredulity, such a shock of silence, as if one had blasphemed the Almighty, that one realized how useless it was even to try to make contact with a mind which had become warped and for whom the facts of life had become what Hitler and Goebbels, with their cynical disregard for truth, said they were. 141. Albert Speer, Hitler’s Minister for Armaments, at his trial after World War II Hitler’s dictatorship differed in one fundamental point from all its predecessors in history. It was the first dictatorship in the present period of modern technical development, a dictatorship which made complete use of all technical means for the domination of its own country. Through technical devices like the radio and the loud-speaker, eighty million people were deprived of independent thought. It was thereby possible to subject them to the will of one man. 142. Adam Weishaupt, founder of the Illuminati By establishing reading societies, and subscription libraries, and taking these under our direction, and supplying them through our labors, we may turn the public mind which way we will. 143. Abraham Lincoln Public sentiment is everything. With public sentiment nothing can fail. Without it nothing can succeed. He who molds opinion is greater than he who enacts laws. 144. M. Russell Ballard, in Conference Report, October 2003 Conspiring men and women, intent on gain rather than goodness, stir up the people to all manner of wickedness, preventing the noble uses to which the media could be employed. … The time has come when members of the Church need to speak out and join with the many other concerned people in opposition to the offensive, destructive, and mean-spirited media influence that is sweeping over the earth. 145. Frank Zappa, musician and cultural iconoclast The illusion of freedom [in America] will continue as long as it’s profitable to continue the illusion. At the point where the illusion becomes too expensive to maintain, they will just take down the scenery, they will pull back the curtains, they will move the tables and chairs out of the way and you will see the brick wall at the back of the theater. 146. Johann Wolfgang von Goethe, German writer, humanist, scientist, and philosopher None are so hopelessly enslaved as those who falsely believe they are free. 147. J. Reuben Clark, Jr., in Deseret News, “Church Section,” 25 Sept. 1949, pp. 2, 15 If we do not vigorously fight for our liberties, we shall go clear through to the end of the road and become another Russia, or worse. 148. H. Rowan Gaither, President of the Ford Foundation, 1953, quoted in “Applying the ‘Pincers’ Strategy,” The New American, vol. 12, no. 19 (16 Sept. 1996), p. 57 Most of us here were, at one time or another, active in either the O.S.S., the State Department, or the European Economic Administration. During those times, and without exception, we operated under directives issued by the White House, the substance of which was to the effect that we should make every effort to so alter life in the United States as to make possible a comfortable merger with the Soviet Union. We are continuing to be guided by just such directives. 149. Vladimir Ilich Lenin The aim of socialism is not only to abolish the present division of mankind into small states and all-national isolation, not only to bring the nations closer to each other, but also to merge them. 150. American Jewish Committee’s Magazine, Commentary, November 1958, p. 376 The International government of the United Nations, stripped of its legal trimming, then, is really the International Government of the United States and the Soviet Union acting in unison. 151. Ezra Taft Benson, BYU Address, 10 Dec. 1963 Let us have no blind devotion to the communist-dominated United Nations. 152. Senator James O. Eastland, Activities of U.S. Citizens Employed by the UN (Hearings), Congressional Record (1951) I am appalled at the extensive evidence indicating that there is today in the UN among the American employees there, the greatest concentration of communists that this Committee has ever encountered. … These people occupy high positions. They have very high salaries and almost all of these people have, in the past, been employees in the U.S. government in high and sensitive positions. 153. Major George Racey Jordan USAF, Ret., Major Jordan’s Diaries (1952) There seemed to be no lengths to which some American officials would not go in aiding Russia to master the secret of nuclear fission. 154. Howard C. Peterson, U.S. Assistant Secretary of War, testimony during a Senate investigation, led by Senator Styles Bridges, chairman of the Committee on Appropriations 6/47, Congressional Record (1952) The American people are bound to the people of the Soviet Union in the great alliance of the United Nations. We are determined that nothing shall stop us from sharing with you all that we have. 155. Senator Barry Goldwater, Congressional Record (1971) The time has come to recognize the United Nations for the anti-American, anti-freedom organization that it has become. The time has come for us to cut off all financial help, withdraw as a member, and ask the United Nations to find headquarters location outside the United States that is more in keeping with the philosophy of the majority of voting members, someplace like Moscow or Peking. 156. Jack Anderson, Washington Post (1971) Indeed, the U.N. is the main Soviet espionage center in this country. 157. Political Affairs (April 1945), the official publication of the American Communist Party (CPUSA) Great popular support and enthusiasm for the United Nations policies should be built up, well organized and fully articulate. But it is necessary to do more than that. The opposition must be rendered so impotent that it will be unable to gather any significant support in the Senate against the United Nations Charter and the treaties which will follow. 158. Soviet General Bondarenko, lecture at the Frunze Military Academy in Moscow, as revealed by Czech intelligence officer defector, Colonel Jan Bukar at Executive Hearings before the House Committee on Un-American Activities, Soviet Schedule For War, Congressional Record (1953) From the rostrum of the United Nations, we shall convince the colonial and semicolonial people to liberate themselves and to spread the Communist theory all over the world. 159. Representative John E. Rankin, who served sixteen terms as Mississippi’s First District Representative in the United States House of Representatives, 1945 The United Nations is the greatest fraud in all History. Its purpose is to destroy the United States. 160. President George H. W. Bush, January 1991 We have before us the opportunity to forge for ourselves and for future generations a new world order, a world where the rule of law, not the rule of the jungle, governs the conduct of nations. When we are successful, and we will be, we have a real chance at this new world order, an order in which a credible United Nations can use its peacekeeping role to fulfill the promise and vision of the UN’s founders. 161. New York Times (Nov. 1975) At the founding of the United Nations in San Francisco, Nelson Rockefeller was in the forefront of the struggle to establish not only an American system of political and economic security but a new world order. 162. Professors Laurence H. Shoup and William Minter, in their study Imperial Brain Trust: The CFR and United States Foreign Policy (Monthly Review Press, 1977) The planning of UN can be traced to the “secret steering committee” established by Secretary [of State Cordell] Hull in January 1943. All of the members of this secret committee, with the exception of Hull, a Tennessee politician, were members of the Council on Foreign Relations. They saw Hull regularly to plan, select, and guide the labors of the [State] Department’s Advisory Committee. It was, in effect, the coordinating agency for all the State Department’s postwar planning. 163. Mikhail Gorbachev, dictator of Russia and KGB supremo, in speech to the Soviet Politburo, 1987 Gentlemen, comrades, do not be concerned about all you hear about glasnost and perestroika and democracy in the coming years. These are primarily for outward consumption. There will be no significant internal change within the Soviet Union, other than for cosmetic purposes. Our purpose is to disarm the Americans and let them fall asleep. 164. Kenneth D. Wells, President of Valley Forge Freedoms Foundation, BYU Speech, 30 Apr. 1962, in Speeches, 1962, p. 5 The Communists could succeed if we ever let ourselves be lulled into thinking that they are no longer dangerous to us externally and internally. They would be victorious if we were ever duped by their own nationals or by foolish Americans—if we were ever duped into believing that they are not aggressive, atheist socialist imperialists. They have proved they never sleep. They have never permanently retreated, and what seems at a particular time to be a cessation of their forward movement or a change in their designs is nothing more than a tactical maneuver on another front. 165. Mikhail Gorbachev, Perestroika—New Thinking for Our Country and the World (1988) Those who hope that we shall move away from the socialist path will be greatly disappointed. Every part of our program of perestroika … is fully based on the principle of more socialism and more democracy. … I would like to be clearly understood … we, the Soviet people, are for socialism. … We want more socialism and, therefore, more democracy. … More socialism means more democracy, openness and collectivism in everyday life. … We will proceed toward better socialism rather than away from it. We are saying this honestly, without trying to fool our own people or the world. Any hopes that we will begin to build a different, non-socialist society and go over to the other camp are unrealistic and futile. Those in the West who expect us to give up socialism will be disappointed. … It’s my conviction that the human race has entered a stage where we are all dependent on each other. No other country or nation should be regarded in total separation from another, let alone pitted against another. That’s what our communist vocabulary calls internationalism and it means promoting universal human values. 166. Mikhail Gorbachev, in an address to the United Nations, 1988 Further global progress is now possible only through a quest for universal consensus in the movement towards a new world order. 167. President George Bush, Texas A&M University, 1989 Ultimately, our objective is to welcome the Soviet Union back into the world order. Perhaps the world order of the future will truly be a family of nations. 168. Brent Scowcroft, in Washington Post (May 1991) We believe we are creating the beginning of a new world order coming out of the collapse of the U.S.-Soviet antagonisms. 169. Adolf Hitler National Socialism will use its own revolution for establishing of a new world order. 170. Mikhail Gorbachev, in New York Times, 1989 I am a Communist, a convinced Communist! For some that may be a fantasy. But to me it is my main goal. 171. Mikhail Gorbachev, speech at the 70th Anniversary of the Bolshevik Revolution, 1987 In October 1917, we parted with the Old World, rejecting it once for all. We are moving toward a new world, the world of Communism. We shall never turn off that road. 172. Fidel Castro, Dictator of Cuba, to the United Nations, 1979 We must establish a new world order based on justice, on equity, and on peace. 173. Joseph Stalin, Dictator of the Soviet Union [After communism succeeds] then, there will come a peace across the earth. 174. Karl Marx, author of the Communist Manifesto The meaning of peace is the absence of opposition to Socialism. 175. President George Bush, State of the Union Address, 1991 For two centuries we’ve done the hard work of freedom. And tonight we lead the world in facing down a threat to decency and humanity. What is at stake is more than one small country, it is a big idea—a new world order, where diverse nations are drawn together in common cause to achieve the universal aspirations of mankind: peace and security, freedom, and the rule of law. Such is a world worthy of our struggle, and worthy of our children’s future. 176. First Epistle of Paul the Apostle to the Thessalonians, chapter 5, verse 3, in the Holy Bible, Authorized King James Version For when they shall say, Peace and Safety: then sudden destruction cometh upon them, as travail upon a woman with child; and they shall not escape. 177. George H. W. Bush, January 1991 If we do not follow the dictates of our moral compass and stand up for human life, then this lawlessness will threaten the peace and democracy of the emerging new world order we now see, this long dreamed-of vision we’ve all worked toward for so long. 178. Ezra Taft Benson, in BYU Address, 10 May 1966 “The adversary,” said Brigham Young, “presents his principle and arguments in the most approved style, and in the most winning tone, attended with the most graceful attitudes; and he is very careful to ingratiate himself into the favor of the powerful and influential of mankind, uniting himself with popular parties, floating into offices of trust and emolument by pandering to popular feeling, though it should seriously wrong and oppress the innocent.” Such characters put on the manners of an angel, appearing as nigh like angels of light as they possibly can, to deceive the innocent and the unwary. The good which they do, they do to bring to pass an evil purpose upon the good and honest followers of Jesus Christ. 179. A. M. Rosenthal, New York Times, January 1991 But it became clear as time went on that in Mr. Bush’s mind the New World Order was founded on a convergence of goals and interests between the U.S. and the Soviet Union, so strong and permanent that they would work as a team through the U.N. Security Council. 180. J. Ralph Thompson, “Our Readers Write,” Ensign, Mar. 1971, p. 73 It is suggested that the solution lies in the United Nations Security Council. It is interesting to note that each solution it achieves invariably results either in the country involved going communist or vast territories being turned to communist-type socialism. The United Nations is the great Trojan horse within our gates, and we can hope for absolutely no help from that quarter, especially while it promotes and arranges finances, encouragement, and prestige to dissenting groups involved in so-called liberation movements of terrorist revolutionary groups. 181. Earl Browder, former General Secretary of the U.S. Communist Party, Victory and After The American communists worked energetically and tirelessly to lay the foundations for the United Nations which we were sure would come into existence. … It can be said, without exaggeration, that ever closer relations between our nation and the Soviet Union are an unconditional requirement for the United Nations as a world coalition. … The United Nations is the instrument for victory. Victory is required for the survival of our nation. The Soviet Union is an essential part of the United Nations. Mutual confidence between our country and the Soviet Union and joint work in the leadership of the United Nations are absolutely necessary. 182. George H. W. Bush, State of the Union Address, 1991 We will succeed in the Gulf. And when we do, the world community will have sent an enduring warning to any dictator or despot, present or future, who contemplates outlaw aggression. The world can therefore seize this opportunity to fulfill the long-held promise of a new world order—where brutality will go unrewarded, and aggression will meet collective resistance. 183. Michael Parenti, political scientist and author The enormous gap between what U.S. leaders do in the world and what Americans think their leaders are doing is one of the great propaganda accomplishments of the dominant political mythology. 184. John Stockwell, U.S. Marine Corps Major, and Chief of Station and National Security Council coordinator for the CIA The major function of secrecy in Washington is to keep the U.S. people … from knowing what the nation’s leaders are doing. 185. Adolph Hitler What luck for the rulers that men do not think. 186. Michael Rivero Most people prefer to believe their leaders are just and fair even in the face of evidence to the contrary, because once a citizen acknowledges that the government under which they live is lying and corrupt, the citizen has to choose what he or she will do about it. To take action in the face of a corrupt government entails risks of harm to life and loved ones. To choose to do nothing is to surrender one’s self-image of standing for principles. Most people do not have the courage to face that choice. Hence, most propaganda is not designed to fool the critical thinker but only to give moral cowards an excuse not to think at all. 187. Winston S. Churchill, Prime Minister of the U.K.; italics added I do not understand this squeamishness about the use of gas. I am strongly in favor of using poisoned gas against uncivilized tribes. The moral effect should be good … and it would spread a lively terror. 188. Winston S. Churchill, in Pall Mall Gazette, 1924 I am in favor of deliberately spreading methodically prepared bacteria among people and animals—mildew … to destroy the harvests, anthrax to destroy horses and livestock, and the plague, in order to kill not only entire armies, but also the inhabitants of large regions. 189. Winston S. Churchill Give me the facts, and I will twist them the way I want, to suit my argument. 190. David O. McKay, in Conference Report, October 1962, p. 8 Above all else, strive to support good and conscientious candidates of either party who are aware of the great dangers inherent in communism and who are truly dedicated to the Constitution in the tradition of our founding fathers. They should also pledge their sincere fealty to our way of liberty—a liberty which aims at the preservation of both personal and property rights. Study the issues, analyze the candidates on these grounds, and then exercise your franchise as free men and women. Never be found guilty of exchanging your birthright for a mess of pottage! 191. Hyrum Smith, 9 April 1844, in History of the Church, vol. 6 (Salt Lake City), p. 323 We engage in the election the same as in any other principle: you are to vote for good men, and if you do not do this it is a sin: to vote for wicked men, it would be sin. Choose the good and refuse the evil. Men of false principles have preyed upon us like wolves upon helpless lambs. Damn the rod of tyranny; curse it. Let every man use his liberties according to the Constitution. Don’t fear man or devil; electioneer with all people, male and female, and exhort them to do the thing that is right. We want a President of the U. S., not a party President, but a President of the whole people; for a party President disfranchises the opposite party. Have a President who will maintain every man in his rights. 192. J. Reuben Clark, Jr., The Improvement Era, vol. 43, no. 7 (July 1940), p. 444 God provided that in this land of liberty, our political allegiance shall run not to individuals, that is, to government officials, no matter how great or how small they may be. Under His plan our allegiance and the only allegiance we owe as citizens or denizens of the United States, runs to our inspired Constitution which God Himself set up. So runs the oath of office of those who participate in government. A certain loyalty we do owe to the office which a man holds, but even here we owe, just by reason of our citizenship, no loyalty to the man himself. In other countries it is to the individual that allegiance runs. This principle of allegiance to the Constitution is basic to our freedom. It is one of the great principles that distinguishes this “land of liberty” from other countries. Thus God added to His priceless blessings to us. I wish to say with all the earnestness I possess that when you youth and maidens see any curtailment of these liberties I have named, when you see government invading any of these realms of freedom which we have under our Constitution, you will know that they are putting shackles on your liberty, and that tyranny is creeping upon you, no matter who curtails these liberties or who invades these realms, and no matter what the reason and excuse therefore may be. 193. Theodore Roosevelt, Works, vol. 21, pp. 316, 321 Patriotism means to stand by the country. It does not mean to stand by the President or any other public official save exactly to the degree in which he himself stands by the country. … Every man who parrots the cry of “stand by the President” without adding the proviso “so far as he serves the Republic” takes an attitude as essentially unmanly as that of any Stuart royalist who championed the doctrine that the King could do no wrong. No self-respecting and intelligent free man could take such an attitude. 194. Joseph Smith, in History of the Church, vol. 6 (Salt Lake City), p. 207 Now it is time to have a President of the United States; and let the people of the whole Union, like the inflexible Romans, whenever they find a promise made by a candidate that is not practiced as an officer, hurl the miserable sycophant from his exaltation, as God did Nebuchadnezzar, to crop the grass of the field with a beast’s heart among the cattle. 195. Truman G. Madsen, The Presidents of the Church, p. 372 Which of the two main political parties in the United States is closest to the vision of the founders of the United States? Neither. 196. Heber C. Kimball, First Counselor in the First Presidency, 13 Aug. 1853, in Journal of Discourses, vol. 2, p. 105 In the United States and in the old countries, they are divided into six or seven hundred different religious denominations, all disagreeing with each other; besides political and a thousand other kinds of divisions and differences, such as whiggery, democratism, socialism, which, in short, may all be summed up under the term, Devilism. This is not the policy of the Latter-day Saints. 197. Eduard Limonov, founder of the National Bolshevik Party in Russia There’s no longer any left or right. There’s the system and the enemies of the system. 198. Anonymous Democracy, by definition, is participatory. Without participation, there is no democracy; that’s why the U.S. doesn’t have one. To participate, one must be educated and interested. There you have it. 199. J. Reuben Clark, Jr., in Conference Report, April 1952, p. 80 Brethren, I do not suppose that any of you have had communistic leanings. I suppose that all of you love your country, love the Constitution, love the free institutions under which we live, love our freedoms. But if there be any, may I ask you, prayerfully and humbly, think this thing over, because if it comes here it will probably come in its full vigor and there will be a lot of vacant places among those who guide and direct, not only this government, but also this Church of ours. 200. Ezra Taft Benson, “A Witness and a Warning,” Ensign, November 1979 My message is a witness and a warning about some of the evils which threaten America—a land I love with all my heart. … Communism introduced into the world a substitute for true religion. It is a counterfeit of the gospel plan. The false prophets of Communism predict a utopian society. This, they proclaim, will only be brought about as capitalism and free enterprise are overthrow, private property abolished, the family as a social unit eliminated, all classes abolished, all governments overthrown, and a communal ownership of property in a classless, stateless society established. Since 1917 this godless counterfeit to the gospel has made tremendous progress toward its objective of world domination. Today, we are in a battle for the bodies and souls of man. It is a battle between two opposing systems: freedom and slavery, Christ and anti-Christ. The struggle is more momentous than a decade ago, yet today the conventional wisdom says, “You must learn to live with Communism and to give up your ideas about national sovereignty.” Tell that to the millions—yes, the scores of millions—who have met death or imprisonment under the tyranny of Communism! Such would be the death knell of freedom and all we hold dear. … I have seen the Soviet Union, under its godless leaders, spread its ideology throughout the world. Every stratagem is used—trade, war, revolution, violence, hate, detente, and immorality—to accomplish its purposes. Many nations are now under its oppressive control. Over one billion people—one-fourth of the population of the world—have now lost their freedom and are under Communist domination. We seem to forget that the great objective of Communism is still world domination and control, which means the surrender of our freedom—your freedom—our sovereignty. … President Marion G. Romney, in the First Presidency Message in the September 1979 Ensign, wrote: “Communism is Satan’s counterfeit for the gospel plan, and … it is an avowed enemy of the God of the land. Communism is the greatest anti-Christ power in the world today and therefore the greatest menace not only to our peace but to our preservation as a free people. By the extent to which we tolerate it, accommodate ourselves to it, permit ourselves to be encircled by its tentacles and drawn to it, to that extent we forfeit the protection of the God of this land” (p. 5). The truth is, we have to a great extent accommodated ourselves to Communism—and we have permitted ourselves to become encircled by its tentacles. Though we give lip service to the Monroe Doctrine, this has not prevented Cuba from becoming a Soviet military base, ninety miles off our coastline, nor has it prevented the takeover of Nicaragua in Central America, the surrender of the Panama Canal, or the infiltration by enemy agents within our borders. Never before has the land of Zion appeared so vulnerable to so powerful an enemy as the Americas do at present. And our vulnerability is directly attributable to our loss of active faith in the God of this land, who has decreed that we must worship Him or be swept off. Too many Americans have lost sight of the truth that God is our source of freedom—the Lawgiver—and that personal righteousness is the most important essential to preserving our freedom. So, I say with all the energy of my soul that unless we as citizens of this nation forsake our sins, political and otherwise, and return to the fundamental principles of Christianity and of constitutional government, we will lose our political liberties, our free institutions, and will stand in jeopardy before God. No nation which has kept the commandments of God has ever perished, but I say to you that once freedom is lost, only blood—human blood—will win it back. There are some things we must do at once if we are to stave off a holocaust of destruction. … We must awaken to “a sense of [our] awful situation, because of this secret combination which [is] among [us]” (Ether 8:24). We must not tolerate accommodation with or appeasement toward the false system of Communism. We must demand of our elected officials that we not only resist Communism, but that we will take every measure to prevent its intrusion into this hemisphere. … My single-minded concern is for the freedom and welfare of my countrymen and my posterity, the freedom of all men. 201. J. Reuben Clark, Jr., in Deseret News, “Church Section,” 25 September 1949, pp. 2, 15 The paths we are following, if we move forward thereon, will inevitably lead us to socialism or communism, and these two are as like as two peas in a pod in their ultimate effect upon our liberties. … We may first observe that communism and socialism—which we shall hereafter group together and dub Statism—cannot live with Christianity nor with any religion that postulates a Creator such as the Declaration of Independence recognizes. The slaves of Statism must know no power, no authority, no source of blessing, no God, but the State. … This country faces ahead enough trouble to bring us to our knees in humble honest prayer to God for the help which He alone can give to save us. … Do not think that all these usurpations, intimidations, and impositions are being done to us through inadvertency or mistake, the whole course is deliberately planned and carried out; its purpose is to destroy the Constitution and our Constitutional government; then to bring chaos out of which the new Statism, with its Slavery, is to arise, with a cruel, relentless, selfish, ambitious crew in the saddle, riding hard with whip and spur, a red-shrouded band of night riders for despotism. … If we do not vigorously fight for our liberties, we shall go clear through to the end of the road and become another Russia, or worse. … We have largely lost the conflict so far waged. But there is time to win the final victory, if we can sense our danger, and fight. 202. Gene Adrian Gregory, April 9, 1962, in BYU Speeches of the Year, 1962, p. 5; italics added What are the tactics? What is the strategy which is used by the Communists in this situation? They learned that it would not be possible for them to take Vietnam by default, by elections, or by political action. They were outstripped by the government in South Vietnam in the economic field. If they were to win, it was necessary to resort to force. Consequently, they pulled out Trotsky’s book on terrorism and Communism and the various works of Lenin and Mao Tee-Tung on this subject and they were trained carefully. This is the system which they were to apply during the succeeding years in South Vietnam and are applying ruthlessly now. 203. Gordon B. Hinckley, President of the Church, in Conference Report, October 2001, pp. 87–88; italics added For the first time since we became a nation, the United States has been seriously attacked on its mainland soil. … It was well planned, boldly executed, and the results were disastrous. It is estimated that more than 5,000 innocent people died. … It was cruel and cunning, an act of consummate evil. … It is the terrorist organizations that must be ferreted out and brought down. We of this Church know something of such groups. The Book of Mormon speaks of the Gadianton robbers, a vicious, oath-bound, and secret organization bent on evil and destruction. In their day they did all in their power, by whatever means available, to bring down the Church, to woo the people with sophistry, and to take control of the society. We see the same thing in the present situation. 204. Edward Herman, Professor Emeritus of Finance at the Wharton School of the University of Pennsylvania There is a system of terroristic states—the real terror network—that has spread throughout Latin America and elsewhere over the past several decades, and which is deeply rooted in the corporate interest and sustaining political-military-financial propaganda mechanisms of the United States and its allies in the Free World. 205. Boyd K. Packer, Acting President of the Quorum of the Twelve, in Conference Report, April 2004, pp. 78–81 We must not ignore Moroni’s words when he saw our day and said, “Ye [must] awake to a sense of your awful situation” (Ether 8:24). We cannot take lightly this warning from the Book of Mormon: “The Lord in his great infinite goodness doth bless and prosper those who put their trust in him … , doing all things for the welfare and happiness of his people; yea, then is the time that they do harden their hearts, and do forget the Lord their God, and do trample under their feet the Holy One—yea, and this because of their ease, and their exceedingly great prosperity. “And thus we see that except the Lord doth chasten his people with many afflictions, yea, except he doth visit them with death and with terror, and with famine and with all manner of pestilence, they will not remember him” (Helaman 12:1-3; italics added). Did you notice that word terror in that prophetic Book of Mormon warning? … We are not blind to the conditions in the world. The Apostle Paul prophesied of “perilous times” in the last days (2 Timothy 3:1), and he warned, “We wrestle not against flesh and blood, but against principalities, against powers, against the rulers of the darkness of this world, against spiritual wickedness in high places” (Ephesians 6:12). 206. Ezra Taft Benson, in Conference Report, October 1961, p. 70–75; italics added The fight against godless communism is a very real part of every man’s duty who holds the priesthood. It is the fight against slavery, immorality, atheism, terrorism, cruelty, barbarism, deceit, and the destruction of human life through a kind of tyranny unsurpassed by anything in human history. 207. First Presidency Statement, in Conference Report, April 1942, p. 90; italics added We again warn our people in America of the constantly increasing threat against our inspired Constitution and our free institutions set up under it. The same political tenets and philosophies that have brought war and terror in other parts of the world are at work amongst us in America. The proponents thereof are seeking to undermine our own form of government and to set up instead one of the forms of dictatorship now flourishing in other lands. 208. David O. McKay, in The Instructor, February 1856, p. 34 Next to being one in worshiping God, there is nothing in this world upon which this Church should be more united than in upholding and defending the Constitution of the United States! May the appeal of our Lord in His intercessory prayer for unity be realized in our homes, our wards, our stakes, and in our support of the basic principles of our Republic. 209. J. Edgar Hoover, Director of the FBI, in speech entitled “The Faith To Be Free,” on NBC-TV, 1961 The Communist threat from without must not blind us to the Communist threat from within. The latter is reaching into the very heart of America through its espionage agents and a cunning, defiant, and lawless communist party, which is fanatically dedicated to the Marxist cause of world enslavement and destruction of the foundations of our republic. 210. General Mark Clark, From the Danube to the Yalu (1954) Perhaps Communists had wormed their way so deeply into our government on both the working and planning levels that they were able to exercise an inordinate degree of power in shaping the course of America in the dangerous postwar era. I could not help wondering and worrying whether we were faced with open enemies across the conference table and hidden enemies who sat with us in our most secret councils. 211. Abraham Lincoln America will never be destroyed from the outside. If we falter and lose our freedoms, it will be because we destroyed ourselves. 212. Letter from the prison cell of former Congressman and political prisoner, Jim Traficant, November 2003 America is in trouble... not from without, but from within! The Central Government has become too powerful. Citizens fear the Government. This is wrong. This is dangerous! I know the Government covered-up and promulgated LIES about Waco, Ruby Ridge, Pan Am Flight 103, Hoffa, and J.F.K. The Government knew I was right when I called Janet Reno a traitor. Janet Reno sold us out when she refused to investigate a $10-million payoff to the Democratic Party from a general in the Red Chinese Army (no less!). Think about it! And the Government knew that I had known why Reno was forced to betray America! I’m proud that I tried to do something about it! Someday the truth will come out. (I hope China never attacks us!) 213. Charles W. Nibley, in Conference Report, April 1922, p. 162 We need not fear as to this Nation from without. The Lord has said, “I will fortify this land against all other nations.” The danger is not from without, but from within, as the Book of Mormon plainly points out from secret combinations of men giving their first allegiance to their secret combination. That is the danger for after awhile these combinations will be contending one against the other until anarchy is apt to prevail, crime becomes rampant and danger to the existence of our government with its glorious Constitution is great, unless the people turn unto the Lord and seek Him. 214. George W. Bush, shortly before he took office as U.S. President, 21 Dec. 2000, taken from the transcript on CNN’s web site, http://transcripts.cnn.com. If this were a dictatorship, it’d be a heck of a lot easier, just so long as I’m the dictator. 215. James Madison, former U.S. President I believe there are more instances of the abridgment of the freedom of the people by gradual and silent encroachments of those in power than by violent and sudden usurpations. 216. William S. Cohen, U.S. Defense Secretary Terrorism is escalating to the point that Americans soon may have to choose between civil liberties and more intrusive means of protection. 217. Tommy Franks, U.S. General who led the planning and execution of the attacks on Afghanistan in October 2001 and Iraq in March 2003, speaking in an interview with Marvin R. Shanken, in the Nov./Dec. 2003 issue of Cigar Aficionado Two years after the fact of 9/11, we should ask ourselves … what is the worst thing that can happen in our country? The worst thing that can happen is, perhaps—and this is my personal opinion—two steps. The first step would be a nexus between weapons of mass destruction of any variety. It could be chemical, it could be biological, it could be some nuclear device; and terrorism. Terrorists or any human being who is committed to the proposition of terror, try to just create casualties, not for the purpose of annihilation, but to terrify a population. … That goes to step number two, which is that the western world, the free world, loses what it cherishes most, and that is freedom and liberty we’ve seen for a couple of hundred years in this grand experiment that we call democracy. Now, in a practical sense, what does that mean? It means the potential of a weapon of mass destruction and a terrorist, massive casualty-producing event somewhere in the western world—it may be in the United States of America—that causes our population to question our own Constitution and to begin to militarize our country in order to avoid a repeat of another mass-casualty-producing event. Which, in fact, then begins to potentially unravel the fabric of our Constitution. Two steps: very, very important. 218. G. Edward Griffin, The New American, vol. 12, no. 19 (16 Sept. 1996), p. 55; emphasis added A detailed explanation of this strategy appeared in print in the 1950s as two chapters in a textbook used by the Communist Party in Czechoslovakia. Written by Communist Party “theoretician” Jan Kozak, this textbook was used in a training program on how to seize power in countries that have representative government. The strategy involves a political “pincers” movement—and these are the terms Kozak uses to describe it—a “pincers” movement applying political pressure “from above” and “from below.” Pressure from above is created when agents inside the government marked for takeover bring forward recommendations for new big government/police state legislation. This legislation will be promoted as a solution to some kind of national problem, but that will be a ruse. The hidden objective will be to expand the power of the bureaucracy and to move the country closer to the ultimate goal of total government. 219. General Douglas MacArthur, United States general who served as chief of staff and commanded Allied forces in the South Pacific during World War II; he accepted the surrender of Japan, 1957 Our government has kept us in a perpetual state of fear—kept us in a continuous stampede of patriotic fervor—with the cry of grave national emergency. Always, there has been some terrible evil at home, or some monstrous foreign power that was going to gobble us up if we did not blindly rally behind it. 220. H.L. Mencken The whole aim of practical politics is to keep the populace alarmed and hence, clamorous to be led to safety—by menacing it with an endless series of hobgoblins, all of them imaginary. 221. Herman Goering, Nazi Luftwaffe commander, at the Nuremberg Trials Why of course the people don’t want war. … Naturally, the common people don’t want war. … That is understood. But after all it is the leaders of the country who determine the policy, and it is always a simple matter to drag the people along, whether it is a democracy, or a fascist dictatorship, or a parliament, or a communist dictatorship. … Voice or no voice, the people can always be brought to the bidding of the leaders. All you have to do is tell them they are being attacked, and denounce the pacifists for lack of patriotism and exposing the country to danger. 222. Dr. Henry Kissinger, Bilderberg Conference, Evians, France, 1991 Today, America would be outraged if UN troops entered Los Angeles to restore order. Tomorrow they will be grateful! This is especially true if they were told that there were an outside threat from beyond, whether real or “promulgated,” that threatened our very existence. It is then that all peoples of the world will plead to deliver them from this evil. The one thing every man fears is the unknown. When presented with this “scenario,” individual rights will be willingly relinquished for the guarantee of their well-being granted to them by the World Government. 223. Condoleezza Rice, U.S. Secretary of State, March 2000 We need a common enemy to unite us. 224. John Stockwell, U.S. Marine Corps Major, and Chief of Station and National Security Council coordinator for the CIA Enemies are necessary for the wheels of the U.S. military machine to turn. 225. Introduction to the BBC documentary “The Power of Nightmares,” originally aired on BBC 2, 20 Oct. 2004, 9 p.m.; written and produced by Adam Curtis In the past, politicians promised to create a better world. They had different ways of achieving this. But their power and authority came from the optimistic visions they offered to their people. Those dreams failed. And today, people have lost faith in ideologies. Increasingly, politicians are seen simply as managers of public life. But now, they have discovered a new role that restores their power and authority. Instead of delivering dreams, politicians now promise to protect us from nightmares. They say that they will rescue us from dreadful dangers that we cannot see and do not understand. And the greatest danger of all is international terrorism. A powerful and sinister network, with sleeper cells in countries across the world. A threat that needs to be fought by a war on terror. But much of this threat is a fantasy, which has been exaggerated and distorted by politicians. Its a dark illusion that has spread unquestioned through governments around the world, the security services, and the international media. … This is a series of films about how and why that fantasy was created, and who it benefits. At the heart of the story are two groups the American neoconservatives, and the radical Islamists. Both were idealists who were born out of the failure of the liberal dream to build a better world. And both had a very similar explanation for what caused that failure. These two groups have changed the world, but not in the way that either intended. Together, they created today’s nightmare vision of a secret, organized evil that threatens the world. A fantasy that politicians then found restored their power and authority in a disillusioned age. And those with the darkest fears became the most powerful. 226. “Bush Urges More Police Powers Vs. Terror”, Yahoo News, September 10, 2003 President Bush told Congress on Wednesday to “untie the hands” of law enforcement officials and arm them with wider legal powers to combat terrorists, saying the groups that struck America two years ago are wounded but still dangerous. He specifically called for expanding use of the federal death penalty, tougher bail restrictions and greater subpoena powers. … Timothy Edgar, legislative counsel for the American Civil Liberties Union, said all three provisions Bush highlighted were included in a draft sequel to the Patriot Act that was made public earlier this year. “What’s relevant is that President Bush is trying to push through these powers that the Justice Department put together as a sequel to the Patriot Act in a way that further undermines civil rights and civil liberties,” Edgar said. 227. Reference Op Ed page, New York Times, 24 Sept. 2001 If the New World Order agenda is not realized by the terrorist attacks on America and if Americans don’t agree to give up their weapons and relinquish their sovereignty to the New World Order, the next attack will be the use of chemical, biological and/or atomic warfare against the American people. The architects of the New World Order will not hesitate to use as a last resort an atomic or hydrogen bomb in a major American city. 228. Bruce R. McConkie of the Quorum of the Twelve, 31 March 1979, at Welfare Session of General Conference, in “Stand Independent above All Other Creatures,” Ensign, May 1979, p. 93 Nothing except the power of faith and the authority of the priesthood can save individuals and congregations from the atomic holocausts that surely shall be. And so we raise the warning voice and say: Take heed; prepare; watch and be ready. 229. Harold B. Lee of the Quorum of the Twelve, in Improvement Era, Sept. 1961, p. 4 We heard him (President Clark) reply in answer to a question as to why he had put his life savings into his presently owned Grantsville ranch. He said, “This is all I have to leave to my family when I die, and if they are not too lazy to work it, they won’t starve. I have told them that when the first atomic bomb is dropped in America, that they are to go out there on the ranch and stay until it is over.” This last seemed not only to be wise counsel, but also a prophecy. 230. David Rockefeller We are on the verge of a global transformation. All we need is the right major crisis and the nations will accept the New World Order. 231. Dr. Johannes B. Koeppl, Ph.D., former German defense ministry official and advisor to former NATO Secretary General Manfred Werne The interests behind the Bush Administration, such as the CFR, The Trilateral Commission—founded by Brzezinski for David Rockefeller—and the Bilderberger Group, have prepared for and are now moving to implement open world dictatorship within the next five years. They are not fighting against terrorists. They are fighting against citizens. 232. George Q. Cannon, 7 July 1878, in Journal of Discourses, vol. 20 (London, 1880), p. 35 At the present time, in the western States especially, men are greatly concerned about the element known as Communism, which has taken possession of the minds of a numerous class of the people. The working classes are becoming very dissatisfied, and men are trembling for fear of what will come upon the nation. One of the strongest arguments that was made in favor of keeping up the United States army up to its present numbers was, that there would probably be riots in large cities and in populous centers, which would require the presence of the military acting as police to quell. And had it not been for this evil the army would have been cut down. But a good many men were anxious to have it increased, deeming it necessary for the preservation of life and property. When we reflect upon this it shows how changed have become the affairs of our nation, when it is deemed necessary to appeal to military power to maintain good order in the Republic. There can be no surer sign of the decay of a republic than when human life and property and liberty cannot be sustained by the masses of the people, and the military power, the ranks of which are filled with hired soldiers, has to be appealed to sustain good order in the midst of the people. Let such a state of things continue and there would soon be an end of true republicanism. 233. Dick Cheney, speech to the London Institute of Petroleum, 1999 The Middle East, with two-thirds of the world’s oil and lowest cost, is still where the prize ultimately lies. 234. U.S. State Department Memo, 1944 Oil resources constitute a stupendous source of strategic power, and one of the greatest material prizes in world history. 235. Martin Luther King, Jr. If an American is concerned only about his nation, he will not be concerned about the peoples of Asia, Africa, or South America. Is this not why nations engage in the madness of war without the slightest sense of penitence? Is this not why the murder of a citizen of your own nation is a crime, but the murder of citizens of another nation in war is an act of heroic virtue? 236. Ted Koppel, Nightline, 5 March 2003, quoting the Glasgow Sunday Herald (Sept. 15, 2002) A secret blueprint for US global domination reveals that President Bush and his cabinet were planning a premeditated attack on Iraq to secure regime change even before he took power in January 2001… It has been called a secret blueprint for US global domination. … A small group of people with a plan to remove Saddam Hussein long before George W. Bush was elected president. … And 9/11 provided the opportunity to set it in motion. Not since Mein Kampf has a geopolitical punch been so blatantly telegraphed years ahead of the blow. 237. Congressman Ron Paul of Texas, address to the U.S. House of Representatives, 10 July 2003 Since the change of the political party in charge has not made a difference, who is really in charge? If the particular party in power makes little difference, whose policy is it that permits expanded government programs, increased spending, huge deficits, nation building and the pervasive invasion of our privacy, with fewer Fourth Amendment protections than ever before? Someone is responsible, and it is important that those of us who love liberty, and resent big-brother government, identify the philosophic supporters who have the most to say about the direction our country is going. … The so-called conservative revolution of the past two decades has given us massive growth in government size, spending and regulations. Deficits are exploding and the national debt is now rising at greater than a half-trillion dollars per year. … However, [now] the true believers in limited government are now shunned and laughed at. At the very least, they are ignored except when they are used by the new leaders of the right, the new conservatives now in charge of the US government. … Unfortunately, after 9-ll, the cause of liberty suffered a setback. As a result, millions of Americans voted for the less-than-perfect conservative revolution because they believed in the promises of the politicians. Now there is mounting evidence to indicate exactly what happened to the revolution. Government is bigger than ever, and future commitments are overwhelming. … Total U.S. government obligations are $43 trillion, while total net worth of U.S. households is just over $440 trillion. The country is broke, but no one in Washington seems to notice or care. The philosophic and political commitment for both guns and butter and especially for expanding the American empire must be challenged. This is crucial for our survival. … There is abundant evidence exposing those who drive our foreign policy justifying preemptive war. Those who scheme are proud of the achievements in usurping control over foreign policy. These are the neoconservatives of recent fame. Granted, they are talented and achieved a political victory that all policymakers must admire. But can freedom and the republic survive this takeover? … Since 9-11, protection of privacy, whether medical, personal or financial, has vanished. Free speech and the Fourth Amendment have been under constant attack. Higher welfare expenditures are endorsed by the leadership of both parties. Policing the world and nation-building issues are popular campaign targets, yet they are now standard operating procedures. There’s no sign that these programs will be slowed or reversed until either we are stopped by force overseas (which won’t be soon) or we go broke and can no longer afford these grandiose plans for a world empire (which will probably come sooner than later.) … The neoconservatives—a name they gave themselves—diligently worked their way into positions of power and influence. They documented their goals, strategy and moral justification for all they hoped to accomplish. Above all else, they were not and are not conservatives dedicated to limited, constitutional government. … All are key players in designing our new strategy of preemptive war. … Here is a brief summary of the general understanding of what neocons believe: 1.—They agree with Trotsky on permanent revolution, violent as well as intellectual. 2.—They are for redrawing the map of the Middle East and are willing to use force to do so. 3.—They believe in preemptive war to achieve desired ends. 4.—They accept the notion that the ends justify the means—that hardball politics is a moral necessity. 5.—They express no opposition to the welfare state. 6.—They are not bashful about an American empire; instead they strongly endorse it. 7.—They believe lying is necessary for the state to survive. 8.—They believe a powerful federal government is a benefit. 9.—They believe pertinent facts about how a society should be run should be held by the elite and withheld from those who do not have the courage to deal with it. 10.—They believe neutrality in foreign affairs is ill advised. 11.—They hold Leo Strauss in high esteem. 12.—They believe imperialism, if progressive in nature, is appropriate. 13.—Using American might to force American ideals on others is acceptable. Force should not be limited to the defense of our country. 14.—9-11 resulted from the lack of foreign entanglements, not from too many. 15.—They dislike and despise libertarians (therefore, the same applies to all strict constitutionalists.) 16.—They endorse attacks on civil liberties, such as those found in the Patriot Act, as being necessary. 17.—They unconditionally support Israel and have a close alliance with the Likud Party. Various organizations and publications over the last 30 years have played a significant role in the rise to power of the neoconservatives. It took plenty of money and commitment to produce the intellectual arguments needed to convince the many participants in the movement of its respectability. … Their views only gained momentum in the 1990s following the first Persian Gulf War—which still has not ended even with removal of Saddam Hussein. They became convinced that a much more militant approach to resolving all the conflicts in the Middle East was an absolute necessity, and they were determined to implement that policy. … The Defense Policy Board, chaired by Richard Perle, played no small role in coordinating the various projects and think tanks, all determined to take us into war against Iraq. It wasn’t too long before the dream of empire was brought closer to reality by the election of 2000 with Paul Wolfowitz, Richard Cheney, and Donald Rumsfeld playing key roles in this accomplishment. The plan to promote an “American greatness” imperialistic foreign policy was now a distinct possibility. Iraq offered a great opportunity to prove their long-held theories. This opportunity was a consequence of the 9-11 disaster. … This [neocon] attitude is a far cry from the advice of the Founders, who advocated no entangling alliances and neutrality as the proper goal of American foreign policy. … Who knows where we’ll go next—Iran, Syria or North Korea? … Power, politics and privilege prevail over the rule of law, liberty, justice and peace. But it does not need to be that way. Neoconism has brought together many old ideas about how government should rule the people. It may have modernized its appeal and packaging, but authoritarian rule is authoritarian rule, regardless of the humanitarian overtones. … Michael Ledeen and other neoconservatives are already lobbying for war against Iran. Ledeen is pretty nasty to those who call for a calmer, reasoned approach by calling those who are not ready for war “cowards and appeasers of tyrants.” Because some urge a less militaristic approach to dealing with Iran, he claims they are betraying America’s best “traditions.” 238. Georgie Anne Geyer, The Washington Times, 16 March 2004, page A19 An idea is growing in foreign policy circles in Washington … that there is no turning back. We are stuck in Iraq and Afghanistan for 25 to 40 years, we are embedded in our prideful unilateralism, and nothing can return us to more traditional American values and principles of action. The hubristic creators of this “inevitability” planned it this way. … Their failures in Iraq have not stopped the fanatic, power-hungry neoconservatives. … The hard-liners who dominate this administration … have led us to eternal conflict with Muslims. 239. Condoleezza Rice, March 2000, Houston, TX Separation of powers is a problem for foreign policy. 240. President George W. Bush, in his autobiography entitled A Charge to Keep (1999) During my senior year I joined Skull and Bones, a secret society, so secret I can’t say anything more. 241. Manley P. Hall, high level occultist, The Secret Destiny of America (1944) Secret Societies have existed among all peoples, savage and civilized, since the beginning of recorded history... It is beyond question that the secret societies of all ages have exercised a considerable degree of political influence. 242. Major General J.F.C. Fuller, British military historian, 1941 The government of the Western nations, whether monarchical or republican, had passed into the invisible hands of a plutocracy, international in power and grasp. It was, I venture to suggest, this semi-occult power which … pushed the mass of the American people into the cauldron of World War I. 243. Michael Rivero The history of war is the history of powerful individuals willing to sacrifice thousands upon thousands of other people’s lives for personal gains. 244. Admiral Gene LaRocque, U.S. Navy I hate it when they say, “He gave his life for his country.” Nobody gives their life for anything. We steal the lives of these kids. We take it away from them. They don’t die for the honor and glory of their country. We kill them. 245. Smedley Darlington Butler, U.S. Marine Corps Major General, War Is A Racket (1933) War is just a racket. A racket is best described, I believe, as something that is not what it seems to the majority of people. Only a small inside group knows what it is about. It is conducted for the benefit of the very few at the expense of the masses. 246. Smedley Darlington Butler, U.S. Marine Corps Major General, 1935 I spent thirty-three years in the Marines, most of my time being a high class muscle man for Big Business, for Wall Street and the bankers. In short, I was a racketeer for capitalism. 247. Hiram W. Johnson, U.S. Senate, 1917 The first casualty when war comes is truth. 248. Summarization of the Minutes of the meetings of the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace’s Board of Directors for 1908 and 1909, scrutinized by Miss Kathryn Casey, sent by Norman Dodd, Director of Research for the Reece Committee set up by Congress to investigate the tax-exempt foundations. Rene Wormser was the counsel for the Reece Committee who, after the Committee’s report was suppressed, wrote a book about the tax-exempt foundations and the Carnegie Endowment in which he noted: Is there any means known to man more effective than war, assuming you want to alter the life of an entire people? At the end of the year, they came to the conclusion that there was no more effective means to that end known to man. So, then they raised question number two, and the question was, “How do we involve the United States in a war?” 249. Rene Wormser, Foundations: Their Power And Influence (1958) When Andrew Carnegie established The Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, he gave the managers of this fund a difficult task. How were they to go about promoting peace? They seem to have had no very clear idea until Dr. Nicholas Murray Butler … got excited about the peril of the Allies in World War I and decided that the best way to establish peace was to help get the United States into the War. To this end he began to use the Endowment funds. 250. Rene A. Wormser, Chief Counsel to the Reece Committee, which investigated the power and influence of Tax Exempt Foundations during the 1950’s, Foundations, Their Power and Influence (1958) The Council on Foreign Relations, another member of the international complex, financed by the Rockefeller and Carnegie Foundations, overwhelmingly propagandizes the globalist concept. This organization became virtually an agency of the government when World War II broke out. The Rockefeller Foundation had started and financed certain studies known as the War and Peace Studies, manned largely by associates of the Council; the State Department, in due course, took these studies over, retaining the major personnel which the Council on Foreign Relations had supplied. 251. Arthur S. Miller, George Washington University Professor of Law Those who formally rule take their signals and commands not from the electorate as a body, but from a small group of men (plus a few women). This group will be called the Establishment. It exists even though that existence is stoutly denied. It is one of the secrets of the American social order. … A second secret is the fact that the existence of the Establishment—the ruling class—is not supposed to be discussed. 252. Congressman John Rarick, 1971 The Council on Foreign Relations is “the establishment.” Not only does it have influence and power in key decision-making positions at the highest levels of government to apply pressure from above, but it also announces and uses individuals and groups to bring pressure from below, to justify the high level decisions for converting the U.S. from a sovereign Constitutional Republic into a servile member state of a one-world dictatorship. 253. Dan Smoot: former supervising member of the FBI headquarters staff in the Washington Office and one of the first to research and publish on the activities of the Council on Foreign Relations, The Dan Smoot Report (20 July 1964) The ultimate aim of the Council on Foreign Relations … is … to create a one-world socialist system and make the United States an official part of it. 254. John F. Hylan, Mayor of New York City, 26 Mar. 1922, in New York Times The real menace of our republic is this invisible government which like a giant octopus sprawls its slimy length over city, state and nation. Like the octopus of real life, it operates under cover of a self created screen. … It seizes in its long and powerful tentacles our executive officers, our legislative bodies, our schools, our courts, our newspapers, and every agency created for the public protection. … To depart from mere generalizations, let me say that the head of this octopus are the Rockefellers Standard Oil interests and a small group of powerful banking houses generally referred to as the “international bankers.” The little coterie of powerful international bankers virtually run the United States government for their own selfish purposes. They practically control both political parties, write political platforms, make cats paws of party leaders, use the leading men of private organizations, and resort to every device to place in nomination for high public office only such candidates as will be amenable to the dictates of corrupt big business. … These international bankers and Rockefellers Standard Oil interests control the majority of newspapers and magazines in this country. 255. Senator Daniel K. Inouye, at the Iran Contra Hearings, 1986 There exists a shadowy government with its own Air Force, its own Navy, its own fundraising mechanism, and the ability to pursue its own ideas of national interest, free from all checks and balances, and free from the law itself. 256. Senator Jesse Helms, speech to the Senate, 1987 A careful examination of what is happening behind the scenes reveals that all of these interests are working in concert with the masters of the Kremlin in order to create what some refer to as a “New World Order.” Private organizations such as the Council on Foreign Relations, the Royal Institute of International Affairs, the Trilateral Commission, the Dartmouth Conference, the Aspen Institute for Humanistic Studies, the Atlantic Institute, and the Bilderberg Group serve to disseminate and to coordinate the plans for this so-called new world order in powerful business, financial, academic, and official circles. 257. Mike Culbert, in Independent-Gazette (Richmond, California, 27 June 1974), in reference to his discussions with Charles Colson (a member of Nixon’s cabinet) on the almost total control of U.S. presidents by the outside forces. There is a de facto “secret government” operating nationally and internationally and involved in the highest circles of the U.S. government, exercising an impact over domestic policies and economics ranging between extreme influence to, at times, outright control. This extreme influence to outright control naturally includes the Presidency. The de facto “secret government,” much of whose intellectual—and financial—muscle are to be found in the New York office of the CFR, the great tax-free foundations, and certain international firms and corporations. 258. President John F. Kennedy, speech at Columbia University, ten days before he was assassinated, 12 Nov. 1963 The high office of the president has been used to foment a plot to destroy America’s freedom and before I leave this office, I must inform the citizens of their plight. 259. U.S. President Bill Clinton, 1998 You know, by the time you become the leader of a country, someone else makes all the decisions. … You may find you can get away with virtual presidents, virtual prime ministers, virtual everything. 260. Robert Taft, after his defeat at the 1952 Republican convention Every Republican candidate for President since 1936 has been nominated by the Chase National Bank. 261. Henry Stimson, U.S. Secretary of War, personal diary entries after meetings with President Roosevelt, 1941 We face the delicate question of the diplomatic fencing to be done so as to be sure Japan is put into the wrong and makes the first bad move. … The question was how we should maneuver them [the Japanese] into the position of firing the first shot. 262. Henry Stimson, U.S. Secretary of War, Statement to the Joint Congressional Committee on the Investigation of the Pearl Harbor Attack, 1946 When the news first came that Japan had attacked us my first feeling was of relief that … a crisis had come in a way which would unite all our people. This continued to be my dominant feeling in spite of the news of catastrophes which quickly developed. 263. George W. Bush, U.S. President, in “America’s Chaotic Road to War,” Washington Post (Sunday, 27 Jan. 2002), Page A01 The Pearl Harbor of the 21st century took place today. 264. Theodore Roosevelt, former U.S. President No triumph of peace can equal the armed triumph of war. 265. Theodore Roosevelt, speaking in 1897 In strict confidence … I should welcome almost any war, for I think this country needs one. 266. Charles Austin Beard, Professor at Columbia University, in Saturday Evening Post (1947) The Rockefeller Foundation and the Council on Foreign Relations … intend to prevent, if they can, a repetition of what they call in the vernacular “the debunking journalistic campaign following World War I.” Translated into precise English, this means that the Foundation and the Council do not want journalists or any other persons to examine too closely and criticize too freely the official propaganda and official statements relative to “our basic aims and activities” during World War II. In short, they hope that, among other things, the policies and measures of Franklin D. Roosevelt will escape in the coming years the critical analysis, evaluation and exposition that befell the policies and measures of Woodrow Wilson and the Entente Allies after World War I. 267. William E. Dodd, U.S. Ambassador to Germany, quoted in Facts and Fascism, by George Seldes, and Trading with the Enemy, by Charles Higham, 1937 A clique of US industrialists is hell-bent to bring a fascist state to supplant our democratic government and is working closely with the fascist regime in Germany and Italy. I have had plenty of opportunity in my post in Berlin to witness how close some of our American ruling families are to the Nazi regime. … Certain American industrialists had a great deal to do with bringing fascist regimes into being in both Germany and Italy. They extended aid to help Fascism occupy the seat of power, and they are helping to keep it there. 268. Ezra Taft Benson, in Conference Report, April 1969, p. 14; emphasis added When General William F. Dean was released from a Korean Communist prison camp, the young Chinese psychologists who had been trying to break him said: “General, don’t feel bad about leaving us. You know, we will soon be with you. We are going to capture your country.” Asked how, they replied: “We are going to destroy the moral character of a generation of our young Americans, and when we cave finished you will have nothing with which to really defend yourselves against us.” And so the precepts of men are at work on our youth in so many ways. Said President Clark, “… a tremendous amount of the modern art, of the modern literature and music, and the drama that we have today is utterly demoralizing—utterly.” (Relief Society Magazine, December 1952, p. 792.) Have you been listening to the music that many young folks are hearing today? Some of it is nerve-jamming in nature and much of it has been deliberately designed to promote revolution, dope, immorality, and a gap between parent and child. And some of this music has invaded our church cultural halls. 269. J. Edgar Hoover, Masters of Deceit (1958) There is no doubt that America is now the prime target of international communism. 270. Dr. Jose Delgado, Director of Neuropsychiatry at Yale Medical School, Congressional Record, vol. 118, No. 26 (1974) We need a program of psychosurgery for political control of our society. The purpose is physical control of the mind. Everyone who deviates from the given norm can be surgically mutilated. … The individual may think that the most important reality is his own existence, but this is only his personal point of view. This lacks historical perspective. Man does not have the right to develop his own mind. This kind of liberal orientation has great appeal. We must electronically control the brain. Someday armies and generals will be controlled by electric stimulation of the brain. 271. Joseph Stalin, former dictator of the Soviet Union America is like a healthy body and its resistance is threefold: its patriotism, its morality and its spiritual life. If we can undermine these three areas, America will collapse from within. 272. Brock Chisholm, former Director of the World Health Organization To achieve world government, it is necessary to remove from the minds of men, their individualism, loyalty to family traditions, national patriotism and religious dogmas. 273. Boyd K. Packer, Acting President of the Quorum of the Twelve, in a speech entitled ““Watchman, What of the Night,” given at the Utah Peace Officers Association Fallen Officer Memorial, 6 May 2004 I speak now of another kind of darkness that settles about us, a darkness not caused by the rotation of the earth but one that is invisible to the eye. Evidences of it can be found in every newspaper, every day. It is the darkness that comes into the minds of men and fosters complicity, wickedness, and crime—sometimes unspeakable and brutal. … I close with an alert—a warning. That invisible kind of darkness settles ever more heavily. The word terror, not used much in the past, is now an unwelcome presence. 274. Vladimir Ilich Lenin, former dictator of the Soviet Union, 1921 Corrupt the young, get them away from religion. Get them interested in sex. Make them superficial, destroy their ruggedness. Get control of all means of publicity and thereby: Get the peoples’ mind off their government by focusing their attention on athletics, sexy books and plays, and other trivialities. Divide the people into hostile groups by constantly harping on controversial matters of no importance. Destroy the peoples faith in their natural leaders by holding up the latter to ridicule, contempt and obloquy. Always preach true democracy but seize power as fast and as ruthlessly as possible. Encourage government extravagance, destroy its credit, produce fear with rising prices, inflation and general discontent. Foment unnecessary strikes in vital industries, encourage civil disorders and foster a soft and lenient attitude on the part of government towards such disorders. By specious argument cause the breakdown of the old moral virtues: honesty, sobriety, continence, faith in the pledged word, ruggedness. Cause the registration of all firearms on some pretext, with the view of confiscating them and leaving the population defenseless. 275. Janet Reno, U.S. Attorney General Waiting periods are only a step. Registration is only a step. The prohibition of private firearms is the goal. 276. Adolf Hitler This year will go down in history. For the first time, a civilized nation had full gun registration! Our streets will be safer, our police more efficient, and the world will follow our lead into the future! 277. Sara Brady, Chairman of Handgun Control, to Senator Howard Metzanbaum, The National Educator (January, 1994) Our task of creating a socialist America can only succeed when those who would resist us have been totally disarmed. 278. Thomas S. Monson, “The Women’s Movement: Liberation or Deception?” Ensign, Jan. 1971, pp. 17–20 Recently I read with interest feature articles that appeared in five widely circulated American publications. All presented information regarding the subject of women’s liberation. Several of the articles called attention to the fact that 1970 marked the fiftieth anniversary of the right of women to vote in the United States. And from this base came a description of the goals and demands that are now being made by some women: free abortion, free child care, and equal employment. One piece suggested that women should literally demand these things. This article then went on to describe much of Friedrich Engels’ philosophy. Engels, you will recall, was a colleague of Karl Marx and spoke out with irony and force against much of family life. He referred to marriage as a dreary mutation of slavery, urged its abolition, and suggested a public responsibility for the upbringing of children. In another magazine there was a report dealing with “The Motherhood Myth.” This article debunked the idea that there is anything particularly fulfilling and satisfying about being a mother. It quoted one psychiatrist who suggested that people should move from planned parenthood to planned unparenthood and that it would be more loving to children not to have them. The author of the article, a senior editor of the magazine, concluded: “If God were still speaking to us in a voice we could hear, even He would probably say, ‘Be fruitful. Don’t multiply.’.” Such idiotic and blatantly false philosophy must not be entertained or believed. For God has spoken. Indeed, he has spoken in a voice clearly understood by those who have ears to hear and hearts that know and feel. … Error, sin, lust, envy, and evil thrive in the midst of today’s prosperity. More than $5 million a year is spent on pornographic literature by which vile men try to “dig gold out of dirt.” Magazines, movies, television programs, and other mass media are utilized to lower moral standards and behavior. Crime and delinquency are rampant, and spiritual values are questioned. Our interests are centered in ourselves. We are preoccupied with material things. Many of us are more concerned about conquering space than about conquering ourselves. We are more dedicated to material security than to inner purity. We give much more thought to what we wear, what we eat, what we drink, and what we can do to relax than we give to what we are. … What the modernists, even the liberationists, fail to remember is that women, in addition to being persons, also belong to a sex, and that with the differences in sex are associated important differences in function and behavior. Equality of rights does not imply identity of functions. 279. F. C. Blahut, “Communism Isn’t Dead, It’s Just Been Renamed,” ?????? The rise of political correctness has coincided with the fall of Western cultural norms. Few recognize the connection between the two trends. The connection is called Cultural Communism. What we here in the United States and in Christian Europe are actually witnessing is the planned destruction of Western Civilization. It is no accident. In 1917, when the Bolsheviks came to power in Russia, their attack was economic and political. Only after they had seized power did they turn to destroying the Christian-based culture of the West. With the political correctness movement we see the reverse—an attack on the Christian culture so that the communists can take over. And cultural bolshevism is winning while Christian leaders wring their hands. In a recent speech to a meeting of the World Council of Churches, Anglican Archbishop Dr. George Carey of Canterbury said: “For much of this century, the Western church, especially in Europe, has accepted the decline as the inevitable result of secularism.” True; but he failed to identify the drive force behind the slide. Nature abhors a vacuum. When one culture dies, it is replaced by another until nothing is left of the former. And when Western Christian culture is destroyed, it will be replaced by chaos, anarchy and violence as a norm. All this without any casualties on the side of the conspirators. Cultural Communism encompasses all of the modernist changes that have invaded America including—but not limited to—multiculturalism, feminism, racial and gender quotas, school busing based on race and so forth. How far we have sunk into the morass of this Cultural Communism in less than 50 years is easily identifiable—and frightening. As essayist William S. Lind says: “If a man from America of the 1950s were suddenly introduced into America in the 1990s, he would hardly recognize it as the same country. He would be in immediate danger of getting mugged, carjacked or worse, because he would not have learned to live in constant fear.” Again, this is not by accident. Every step in the decline of Western culture has been planned for years. … One of the main targets of Cultural Communism is Christianity. Some leaders, such as the archbishop of Canterbury quoted above, witness the decline as a natural force. They unwittingly help the communists. Others see the planned destruction without specifically identifying the enemy or suggesting practical ways of resisting … And there is a key part of the problem—the inability of leaders to admit that these incessant attacks on our culture are part of a plan—a conspiracy. … The hour grows late. We must identify the enemy and fight him, even when that means punishment by the powers-that-be. We must call this attack what it is—a deliberate effort to destroy all that made us the most powerful country in the world in order to turn us into the field workers of the coming Global Plantation. 280. Gordon B. Hinckley, 4 Aug. 1996, in Church News There has been going on in this nation for a good while a process which I call, “secularizing America.” It is of this that I wish to say a few words this evening because I feel so strongly about it and because I feel we are paying a terrible price because of it. … We live under a Constitution that after more than two centuries stands as the greatest bulwark of human freedom to be found anywhere on earth. … This Constitution is the keystone of our national life. … My great concern, my great interest, is that we preserve for the generations to come those wondrous elements of our society and manner of living that will bequeath to them the strengths and goodness of which we have been the beneficiaries. But I worry as I see some of the signs of sickness of which I have spoken. I believe that a significant factor in the decay we observe about us comes of a forsaking of the God whom our fathers knew, loved, worshiped, and looked to for strength. There is a plainly discernable secularization that is occurring. Its consequences are a deterioration of family life, a weakening of self-discipline, a scoffing at the thought of accountability unto the Almighty, and an unbecoming arrogance for any people who have been so richly blessed through the goodness of a generous Providence as we have been. 281. Neal A. Maxwell, “Eternalism vs. Secularism,” Ensign, Oct. 1974 Secularism tends to want to deal increasingly with systems, governments, labels, groups, etc.—with adjustments in the things outside man, apparently hoping that, somehow, changing the external scenery will change the things inside man. … We are rightfully worried about the swelling bureaucracies of government, which need to respond to us—not to regiment us. But we cannot tame those bureaucracies unless we first tame our appetites, for a bloated bureaucracy is merely a manifestation of citizen appetites, demands, and the subsequent need for external controls. … If we are not able to build into ourselves and our families the brakes of self-restraint and self-discipline, we are apt, unwittingly, to create tyranny in our government or anarchy in our citizenry. If we push onto the government the management not only of our economy, but also the management of our morals, the civil servants of the future will be neither civil nor servants. 282. James E. Faust, “A New Civil Religion,” Ensign, Oct. 1992, p. 69–71 There seems to be developing a new civil religion. The civil religion I refer to is a secular religion. It has no moral absolutes. It is nondenominational. It is nontheistic. It is politically focused. It is antagonistic to religion. It rejects the historic religious traditions of America. It feels strange. If this trend continues, nonbelief will be more honored than belief. While all beliefs must be protected, are atheism, agnosticism, cynicism, and moral relativism to be more safeguarded and valued than Christianity, Judaism, and the tenets of Islam, which hold that there is a Supreme Being and that mortals are accountable to him? If so, this would, in my opinion, place America in great moral jeopardy. … The new civil religion I speak of finds its source of rights by invoking the power of the state. It seems to have little purpose, few common values for morality except self-interest. … The new civil religion is, in my opinion, coming dangerously close to become a de facto state religion of secularism. … So now we find ourselves in a situation where, unlike the Pilgrims, the Mormon pioneers, and others, there is nowhere to go to escape a new civil de facto secular state religion that continually limits public religious expression and fosters instead the secular values and expressions. How do we preserve the essence of our humanity? … We can exercise our right, with all other citizens, to vote for men and women who reflect our own values. We can also express our views as all other citizens have a right to do in the legislative process of both the state and the nation. With all others, we can claim our rights of free expression. We can petition for the redress of grievances. We must hold to our beliefs and do what we can, for there is no desert to flee to in order to have full freedom. There is no place across the waters for the Pilgrims. 283. Steve Bonta, “Creating the New World Religion,” The New American, 3 July 2000, pp. 40–41 In the new world order we may anticipate not only world government under the UN, but also, clearly, a State-sponsored new world religion militantly intolerant of religious “fundamentalism.” The globocrats have no intention of allowing freedom of religion under a new world order, and are working tirelessly to create conditions in which religious persecution under a UN-administered world government will be feasible. According to Hans Küng, a theologian influential in globalist circles, “Any form of … church conservatism is to be rejected.... To put it bluntly: no regressive or repressive religion—whether Christian, Islamic, Jewish or of whatever provenance—has a long-term future.” Gerald Barney, director of the Millennium Institute, reported that a prominent internationalist once told him: “Religion must die. It is the fundamental cause of virtually all social, economic, and ecological problems and much of the violence in world.” As we surrender more and more of our political and economic sovereignty and freedom to the United Nations and kindred internationalist organizations, we will increasingly see our religion, morals, and way of life under attack by this same gang of megalomaniacal internationalists. Like the radicals and utopian revolutionaries of every age, they will not be content with mere control of our commerce, our militaries, and our civil laws; they will insist on attacking and destroying our families, our churches, and our culture as well, inasmuch as these institutions pose a threat to their long-term design of world domination. For our Judeo-Christian belief systems they will substitute paganism; for love of God and our fellow men they will offer up worship of the ecosystem; and instead of traditional families, marriage, and moral restraint they will promulgate abortion, promiscuity, and sexual deviance. In a preview of coming attractions, all of these are already being pushed in varying degrees by various amoral international agencies. In the still-robust remnants of our Judeo-Christian, Western Culture, we have the resources to repudiate the UN’s assault on our nation, our religion, and, indeed, on our liberty. We must recognize the UN as a powerful adversary in the so-called “culture war,” and for that, among many other reasons, work diligently to Get US out! 284. First Presidency Statement, 9 Mar. 1979, in “News of the Church,” Ensign, May 1979, p. 108 We, thus, deplore the growing efforts to establish irreligion, such as atheism or secularism, as the official position of the United States of America, thus obscuring and eroding the rich and diverse religious heritage of our nation. 285. John Taylor, Salt Lake Tribune, 6 Jan. 1880 We believe in honesty, morality and purity, in freedom and loyalty to our country; but when they enact tyrannical laws, forbidding us the free exercise of our religion, we cannot submit. God is greater than the United States. And when the Government conflicts with Heaven, we will be ranged under the banner of Heaven and against the Government. … We do not want to rebel against the United States. Rebellion is not on the program, but we will worship God according to the dictates of our own conscience. We want to be friendly with the United States, if the Government will let us; but not one jot nor title of our rights will we give up to purchase it. … I defy the United States. I will obey God. These are my sentiments, and all of you who sympathize with me in this position raise your hands. (All hands went up sustaining his position.) 286. Thomas Jefferson, former U.S. President The spirit of resistance to government is so valuable on certain occasions that I wish it to be always kept alive. It will often be exercised when wrong, but better so than not to be exercised at all. 287. Abraham Lincoln, former U.S. President, 1863 This country, with its institutions, belongs to the people who inhabit it. Whenever they shall grow weary of the existing government, they can exercise their constitutional right of amending it, or exercise their revolutionary right to overthrow it. 288. Samuel Adams, American revolutionary, and signatory of the Declaration of Independence If ever time should come, when vain and aspiring men shall possess the highest seats in Government, our country will stand in need of its experienced patriots to prevent its ruin. 289. Edmund Burke, British statesman, author, orator and political philosopher All that is necessary for evil to succeed is that good men do nothing. 290. John “Birdman” Bryant, self labeled as “The World’s Most Controversial Author” If you are afraid to speak against tyranny, then you are already a slave. 291. George Orwell, novelist and political and cultural commentator Speaking the Truth in times of universal deceit is a revolutionary act. 292. Antonio Gramsci, Italian communist and “class warrior,” 1915 Socialism is precisely the religion that must overwhelm Christianity. … In the new order, Socialism will triumph by first capturing the culture via infiltration of schools, universities, churches and the media by transforming the consciousness of society. 293. Paul Blanchard, The Humanist (1976) I think the most important factor moving us toward a secular society has been the educational factor. Our schools may not teach Johnny to read properly, but the fact that Johnny is in school until he is 16 tends to lead toward the elimination of religious superstition. The average high school child acquires a high school education, and this militates against Adam and Eve and all other myths of alleged history. When I was one of the editors of The Nation in the twenties, I wrote an editorial explaining that golf and intelligence were the two primary reasons that men did not attend church. Perhaps today I would say golf and a high school diploma. 294. Ezra Taft Benson, “The Greatest Work in the World,” Improvement Era, vol. 70 (January 1967), p. 26; Also in The Teachings of Ezra Taft Benson (Salt Lake City: Bookcraft, 1988) pp. 320–321 From the fifth grade through the fourth year of college, our young people are being indoctrinated with a Marxist philosophy, and I am fearful of the harvest. The younger generation is further to the left than most adults realize. The old concepts of our Founding Fathers are scoffed and jeered at by young moderns whose goals appear to be the destruction of integrity and virtue, and the glorification of pleasure, thrills, and self-indulgence. 295. Ezra Taft Benson, in Conference Report, October 1970, p. 22 As a watchman on the tower, I feel to warn you that one of the chief means of misleading our youth and destroying the family unit is our educational institutions. President Joseph F. Smith referred to false educational ideas as one of the three threatening dangers among our Church members. … The tenth plank in Karl Marx’s Manifesto for destroying our kind of civilization advocated the establishment of “free education for all children in public schools.” There were several reasons why Marx wanted government to run the schools. Dr. A. A. Hodge pointed out one of them when he said, “It is capable of exact demonstration that if every party in the State has the right of excluding from public schools whatever he does not believe to be true, then he that believes most must give way to him that believes least, and then he that believes least must give way to him that believes absolutely nothing, no matter in how small a minority the atheists or agnostics may be. It is self-evident that on this scheme, if it is consistently and persistently carried out in all parts of the country, the United States system of national popular education will be the most efficient and widespread instrument for the propagation of atheism which the world has ever seen.” After the tragic prayer decision was made by the Court, President David O. McKay stated, “The Supreme Court of the United States severs the connecting cord between the public schools of the United States and the source of divine intelligence, the Creator, himself.” (Relief Society Magazine, December 1962, p. 878.) 296. Boyd K. Packer, 9 Oct. 1996, in Charge to the David O. McKay School of Education at BYU In many places it is literally not safe physically for youngsters to go to school. And in many schools—and it’s becoming almost generally true—it is spiritually unsafe to attend public schools. Look back over the history of education to the turn of the century and the beginning of the educational philosophies, pragmatism and humanism were the early ones, and they branched out into a number of other philosophies which have led us now into a circumstance where our schools are producing the problems that we face. 297. Adam Weishaupt, founder of the Illuminati, quoted in John Robinson’s Proofs of a Conspiracy, 1795, reprinted by Western Islands, Boston, 1967, p. 111 We must win the common people in every corner. This will be obtained chiefly by means of the schools; and by open, hearty behavior, show condescension, popularity, and toleration of their prejudices, which we shall at leisure root out and dispel. 298. Senator William Jenner, Congressional Record (1952) I want to make one thing clear. This war against our constitution is not being fought way off in Madagascar or in Mandalay. It is being fought here—in our schools, our colleges, our churches, our women’s clubs. It is being fought with our money, channeled through the State Department. It is being fought twenty-four hours a day—while we remain asleep. How many of you Senators know what the UN is doing to change the teaching of the children in your own home town? The UN is at work there, every day and night, changing the teachers, changing the teaching materials, changing the very words and tones—changing all the essential ideas which we imagine our schools are teaching to our young folks. How in the name of Heaven are we to sit here, approve these programs, appropriate our own people’s money—for such outrageous “orientation” of our own children, and of the men and women who teach our children, in this Nation’s schools? 299. Ezra Taft Benson, in Conference Report, October 1961 We should accept the command of the Lord and treat socialistic communism as a tool of Satan. We should follow the counsel of the President of the Church and resist the influence and policies of the socialistic-communist conspiracy wherever they are found—in the schools, in the churches, in governments, in unions, in business, in agriculture. 300. J. Reuben Clark, Jr., quoted in “Church Welfare Services’ Basic Principles,” Ensign, May 1976, p. 121 You must remember that back and behind this whole propaganda of “pensions,” gratuities, and doles to which we are now being subjected, is the idea of setting up in America, a socialistic or communistic state, in which the family would disappear, religion would be prescribed and controlled by the state, and we should all become mere creatures of the state, ruled over by ambitious and designing men. 301. Ezra Taft Benson, President of the Church, A Witness and a Warning (Salt Lake City: Deseret Book Co., 1988), p. 6; See also “News of the Church,” Ensign, Sept. 1987, p. 78; “First Presidency Message: The Book of Mormon Is the Word of God,” Ensign, Jan. 1988, p. 5; Ensign, May 1975, p. 65 Our families may be corrupted by worldly trends and teachings unless we know how to use the [Book of Mormon] to expose and combat the falsehoods in socialism, organic evolution, rationalism, humanism, and so forth. 302. Ezra Taft Benson, “Jesus Christ—Gifts and Expectations,” New Era, May 1975, p. 19 If we really did our homework and approached the Book of Mormon doctrinally, we could expose the errors and find the truths to combat many of the current false theories and philosophies of men, including socialism, humanism, organic evolution, and others. I have noted within the Church the difference in discernment, in insight, conviction, and spirit between those who know and love the Book of Mormon and those who do not. That book is a great sifter. 303. Norman Thomas, Socialist Party’s presidential candidate, 1948 The American people will never knowingly adopt Socialism, but under the name of “liberalism,” they will adopt every fragment of the Socialist program until one day America will be a Socialist nation without knowing it happened. 304. Brigham Young, President of the Church, 6 May 1870, in Journal of Discourses, vol. 14, pp. 21–22 We heard Brother Taylor’s exposition of what is called Socialism this morning. What can they do? Live on each other and beg. It is a poor, unwise and very imbecile people who cannot take care of themselves. 305. Joseph Stalin, 1936 World dictatorship can be established only when the victory of socialism has been achieved in certain countries or groups of countries … [and] when these federation of republics have finally grown into a world union of Soviet Socialist Republics uniting the whole of mankind under the hegemony of the international proletariat organized as a state. 306. David O. McKay, in Deseret News, “Church Section,” 18 October 1952, p. 2 During the first half of the twentieth century we have traveled far into the soul-destroying land of socialism and made strange alliances through which we have become involved in almost continuous hot and cold wars over the whole of the earth. In this retreat from freedom the voices of protesting citizens have been drowned by raucous riots of intolerance and abuse from those who led the retreat and their millions of gullible youth, who are marching merrily to their doom, carrying banners on which are emblazoned such intriguing and misapplied labels as social justice, equality, reform. patriotism, social welfare. 307. Ezra Taft Benson, 24 May 1961, BYU Speeches of the Year, 1961, pp. 10—11 We do not want a Communist system in the United States, and Communism usually follows Socialism. We do not want anything to do with this criminal conspiracy which is Communism. … I hope that there will not be any students on this campus who will become dupes and tools of Communist agitators, because they are working on practically every campus in America today, including some in our own good state of Utah. I hope you become familiar with this evil system and have nothing to do with it. … The threat of Communism is very real. The threat of Socialism is even more real. Communism is more than an economic system, it is a total philosophy of life, atheistic and utterly opposed to all we hold dear as a great, free Christian nation. No true Latter-day Saint can be a Communist or a Socialist because Communist principles run counter to the revealed word of God and to the Constitution of this land which was established by men whom the God of Heaven raised up unto that very purpose. 308. Ezra Taft Benson, in Conference Report, October 1961, p. 70–75 The Lord revealed to the Prophet Nephi that he established the gentiles on this land to be a free people forever, that if they were a righteous nation and overcame the wickedness and secret abominations which would arise in their midst, they would inherit the land forever. (1 Nephi 14:1-2.) … But on the other hand, if the gentiles on this land reject the word of God and conspire to overthrow liberty and the Constitution, then their doom is fixed, and they “… shall be cut off from among my people who are of the covenant.” (1 Nephi 14:6; 3 Nephi 21:11, 14, 21; D&C 84:114-115, 117.) The great destructive force which was to be turned loose on the earth and which the prophets for centuries have been calling the “abomination of desolation” is vividly described by those who saw it in vision. Ours is the first generation to realize how literally these prophecies can be fulfilled now that God, through science, has unlocked the secret to thermonuclear reaction. In the light of these prophecies there should be no doubt in the mind of any priesthood holder that the human family is headed for trouble. There are rugged days ahead. It is time for every man who wishes to do his duty to get himself prepared—physically, spiritually, and psychologically—for the task which may come at any time, as suddenly as the whirlwind. Where do we stand today? All over the world the light of freedom is being diminished. Across whole continents of the earth freedom is being totally obliterated. Never in recorded history has any movement spread its power so far and so fast as has socialistic-communism in the last three decades. The facts are not pleasant to review. Communist leaders are jubilant with their success. They are driving freedom back on almost every front. It is time, therefore, that every American, and especially every member of the priesthood, became informed about the aims, tactics, and schemes of socialistic-communism. This becomes particularly important when it is realized that communism is turning out to be the earthly image of the plan which Satan presented in the pre-existence. The whole program of socialistic-communism is essentially a war against God and the plan of salvation—the very plan which we fought to uphold during “the war in heaven.” Up to now some members of the Church have stood aloof, feeling that the fight against socialistic-communism is “controversial” and unrelated to the mission of the Church or the work of the Lord. But the President of the Church in our day has made it clear that the fight against atheistic communism is a major challenge to the Church and every member in it. During the general conference of the Church in October 1959, President David O. McKay, in discussing the threat of communism, referred to W. Cleon Skousen’s book, The Naked Communist, and said, “I admonish everybody to read that excellent book.” He then quoted the following from the flyleaf: “The conflict between communism and freedom is the problem of our time. It overshadows all other problems.” The fight against godless communism is a very real part of every man’s duty who holds the priesthood. It is the fight against slavery, immorality, atheism, terrorism, cruelty, barbarism, deceit, and the destruction of human life through a kind of tyranny unsurpassed by anything in human history. Here is a struggle against the evil, satanical priestcraft of Lucifer. Truly it can be called, “a continuation of the war in heaven.” In the war in heaven the devil advocated absolute eternal security at the sacrifice of our freedom. Although there is nothing more desirable to a Latter-day Saint than eternal security in God’s presence, and although God knew, as did we, that some of us would not achieve this security if we were allowed our freedom—yet the very God of heaven, who has more mercy than us all, still decreed no guaranteed security except by a man’s own freedom of choice and individual initiative. Today the devil as a wolf in a supposedly new suit of sheep’s clothing is enticing some men, both in and out of the Church, to parrot his line by advocating planned government guaranteed security programs at the expense of our liberties. Latter-day Saints should be reminded how and why they voted as they did in heaven. If some have decided to change their vote they should repent—throw their support on the side of freedom—and cease promoting this subversion. When all of the trappings of propaganda and pretense have been pulled aside, the exposed hard-core structure of modern communism is amazingly similar to the ancient Book of Mormon record of secret societies such as the Gadiantons. In the ancient American civilization there was no word which struck greater terror to the hearts of the people than the name of the Gadiantons. It was a secret political party which operated as a murder cult. Its object was to infiltrate legitimate government, plant its officers in high places, and then seize power and live off the spoils appropriated from the people. (It would start out as a small group of “dissenters” and by using secret oaths with the threat of death for defectors it would gradually gain a choke hold on the political and economic life of whole civilizations.) The object of the Gadiantons, like modern communists, was to destroy the existing government and set up a ruthless criminal dictatorship over the whole land. … Some timid, vacillating political leaders proclaim that communism is something we will have to learn to live with … whether it is Khrushchev, or some other leader. The present communist system, they declare, will continue because there is no alternate system to replace communism. The policy of increasing power, of pushing their system outward and using the communist party, they say, will go on. Such a negative attitude writes off the hundreds of millions behind the iron curtain as a lost cause. Surely no courageous, liberty-loving citizen will treat the communist secret combination as “something we will have to learn to live with.” … We must ever keep in mind that collectivized socialism is part of the communist strategy. Communism is fundamentally socialism. We will never win our fight against communism by making concessions to socialism. Communism and socialism, closely related, must be defeated on principle. The close relationship between socialism and communism is clearly pointed out by Senator Strom Thurmond of South Carolina in a letter to the editor of the Washington Post, of August 6, 1961, in these words: “The industrial achievements of the U. S. are the result of an economic system which is the antithesis of socialism. Our economic system is called ‘capitalism’ or ‘private enterprise’ and is based on private property rights, the profit motive and competition. “Both communism and socialism seek to destroy our economic system and replace it with socialism; and their success, whether through evolution by socialism or through revolution by communism or a combination, will destroy not only our economic system, but our liberty, including the ‘civil’ aspects as well. … “… The ‘common ground’ of socialism and communism is a factor to which the American people should be alerted. Without a clear understanding that communism is socialism, the total threat and menace of the cold war can never be comprehended and fought to victory.” When socialism is understood, we will realize that many of the programs advocated, and some of those already adopted in the United States, fall clearly within the category of socialism. What is socialism? It is simply governmental ownership and management of the essential means for the production and distribution of goods. We must never forget that nations may sow the seeds of their own destruction while enjoying unprecedented prosperity. The socialistic-communist conspiracy to weaken the United States involves attacks on many fronts. To weaken the American free-enterprise economy which outproduced both its enemies and allies during World War II is a high priority target of the communist leaders. Their press and other propaganda media are therefore constantly selling the principles of centralized or federal control of farms, railroads, electric power, schools, steel, maritime shipping, and many other aspects of the economy—but always in the name of public welfare. This carries out the strategy laid down by the communist masters. John Strachey, a top official in the Labor Socialist party of Great Britain, in his book entitled The Theory and Practice of Socialism said: “It is impossible to establish communism as the immediate successor to capitalism. It is accordingly proposed to establish socialism as something which we can put in the place of our present decaying capitalism. Hence, communists work for the establishment of socialism as a necessary transition stage on the road to communism.” … It is significant that 118 years ago this month the Prophet Joseph Smith, after attending lectures on socialism, made this official entry in church history: “I said I did not believe the doctrine.” (History of the Church, Vol. 6, p. 33.) No true Latter-day Saint and no true American can be a socialist or a communist or support programs leading in that direction. These evil philosophies are incompatible with Mormonism, the true gospel of Jesus Christ. What can priesthood holders do? There are many things we can do to meet the challenge of the adversary in our day. First, we should become informed about communism, about socialism, and about Americanism. What better way can one become informed than by first studying the inspired words of the prophets and using that as a foundation; against which to test all other material. This is in keeping with the Prophet Joseph Smith’s motto, “When the Lord commands, do it.” (Ibid., Vol. 2, p. 170.) The Foundation for Economic Education, Irvington-on-Hudson, New York on which President J. Reuben Clark, Jr., served as a board member, continues to supply sound freedom literature. We should know enough about American free enterprise to be able to defend it. We should know what makes it possible for six percent of humanity—living under our free economy—to produce about one-half of the earth’s developed wealth each year. We should know why paternalism, collectivism, or unnecessary federal supervision will hold our standard of living down and reduce productivity just as it has in every country where it has been tried. We should also know why the communist leaders consider socialism the highroad to communism. Second, we should accept the command of the Lord and treat socialistic communism as the tool of Satan. We should follow the counsel of the President of the Church and resist the influence and policies of the socialist-communist conspiracy wherever they are found—in the schools, in the churches, in governments, in unions, in businesses, in agriculture. Third, we should help those who have been deceived or who are misinformed to find the truth. Unless each person who knows the truth will “stand up and speak up” it is difficult for the deceived or confused citizen to find his way back. Fourth, we should not make the mistake of calling people “communist” just because they happen to be helping the communist cause. Thousands of patriotic Americans, including a few Latter-day Saints, have helped the communists without realizing it. Others have knowingly helped without joining the party. The remedy is to avoid name-calling, but point out clearly and persuasively how they are helping the communists. Fifth, each priesthood holder should use his influence in the community to resist the erosion process which is taking place in our political and economic life. He should use the political party of his choice to express his evaluation of important issues. He should see that his party is working to preserve freedom, not destroy it. He should join responsible local groups interested in promoting freedom and free competitive enterprise, in studying political issues, appraising the voting records and proposed programs, and writing to members of Congress, promoting good men in public office and scrutinizing local, state, and federal agencies to see that the will of the people is being carried out. He should not wait for the Lord’s servants to give instruction for every detail once they have announced the direction in which the priesthood should go. Each member should exercise prayerful judgment and then act. … May God give us the wisdom to recognize the threat to our freedom and the strength to meet this danger courageously. Yes, perilous times are ahead, but if we do our duty in all things, God will give us inner peace and overrule all things for our good. 309. J. Reuben Clark, Jr., in Deseret News, “Church Section,” 16 June 1945, p. 4 Today government has touched our lives so intimately in all their relationships and all these governmental touchings have been so tabbed as political, that we cannot discuss anything relating to our material welfare and existence without laying ourselves liable to the charge that we are talking politics. 310. Ezra Taft Benson, in Conference Report, April 1968, p. 50 If American freedom is lost, if America is destroyed, if our blood-bought freedom is surrendered, it will be because of Americans. What’s more, it will probably not be only the work of subversive and criminal Americans. The Benedict Arnolds will not be the only ones to forfeit our freedom. “At what point, then, is the approach of danger to be expected?” asked Abraham Lincoln, and he answered, “If it ever reaches us, it must spring up among us. It cannot come from abroad. If destruction be our lot, we must ourselves be its author and finisher; as a nation of freemen, we must live through all time or die by suicide.” (Springfield, Illinois, January 27, 1837.) If America is destroyed, it may be by Americans who salute the flag, sing the national anthem, march in patriotic parades, cheer Fourth of July speakers—normally good Americans, but Americans who fail to comprehend what is required to keep our country strong and free—Americans who have been lulled away into a false security. … “Unless those in authority in the United States can be influenced to abandon the suicidal course on which they have embarked—or unless they can be replaced by men who will—we cannot hope to restore in our nation the kind of domestic peace and order which has made our many generations proud to be Americans … living in a land of freedom, security, opportunity, and justice under law. “The crisis we now face is the most serious, the most dangerous, in the history of our country. Each of us must diligently employ our influence and our effort—in speech, letters, and at the ballot box—to help set straight the way.” The facts are clear. Our problem centers in Washington, D.C. And this applies to the administration of both political parties. In the words of James Madison, “Since the general civilization of mankind, I believe there are more instances of the abridgment of freedom of the people by gradual and silent encroachments of those in power, than by violent and sudden usurpations.” (Elliot’s Debates, Vol. 3, p. 87.) 311. Ezra Taft Benson, in Conference Report, October 1961 Our priceless heritage is threatened today as never before in our lifetime: from without by the forces of Godless Communism, and at home by our complacency and by the insidious forces of the Socialist-Communist conspiracy, with the help of those who would abandon the ancient landmarks set by our fathers and take us down the road to destruction. 312. Ezra Taft Benson, in Conference Report, October 1960, p. 101–106 We live today in an age of peril. It is an age in which we are threatened with the loss not only of wealth and material prosperity, but also of something far more precious—our freedom itself. The very thing that distinguishes man from the beasts—man s freedom to act: freedom to choose—is threatened as never before by a total and atheistic philosophy of life known as communism. In April, I called your attention briefly to the nature of communism. Let us remember these basic facts. Those who subscribe to this philosophy stop at nothing to achieve their ends. They do not hesitate to destroy—if they are strong enough—whatever stands in their way. Our own generation has witnessed the Russian communists liquidate millions of their fellow countrymen. Even more recently we have seen the Chinese communists wipe out millions of their fellow countrymen—no one knows the exact number. To the true communist, nothing is evil if it is expedient. Being without conscience or honor, he feels completely justified in using whatever means are necessary to achieve his goal: force, trickery, lies, broken promises, mayhem, and individual and mass murder. By these ruthless means communism has, in a little over forty years, brought more people under its domination than the total number of Christians now living in the entire world—and Christianity, as the world thinks of it, has been in existence for nearly two thousand years. … Let us have no illusions about them. Their leader has told us bluntly—their purpose is not alone to enslave us—they want to bury us. And while it is apparently true that Chairman Khrushchev is content for the time being at least to avoid war as a means of communist expansion, there is little doubt that the leaders of Red China view war as inevitable and await only the propitious moment in which to strike. What we face today is not just a cold war, not just a struggle for the control of land, sea, air, and even outer space, but total competition for the control of men’s minds. Unless we meet it and defeat it, we shall almost inevitably one day face the loss of all that we hold dear. In less than half a century, I repeat, this evil system has gained control over one-third of mankind, and it is steadily pursuing its vicious goal of control over all the rest of the world. It is time, and past time, for us to be alarmed. “Wo be unto him that is at ease. Wo be unto him that crieth ‘all is well.’.” (2 Nephi 28:24-25.) … The only political party now functioning in Cuba is the Popular Socialist Party, the Communist Party under another name. ¼ We must revivify Western ideals and in particular the ideals of our own great nation. We must call back the spirit of the dauntless leaders of the past. We must meet our present-day challenge not with softness and complacency, but with the depth, wisdom, and daring that characterized America in the days of old. … The communists bring to the nations they infiltrate a message and a philosophy that affects human life in its entirety. Communism seeks to provide, what in too many instances a lukewarm Christianity has not provided, a total interpretation of life. Communists are willing to be revolutionary; to take a stand for this and against that. They challenge what they do not believe in—customs, practices, ideas, traditions. They believe heatedly in their philosophy. But our civilization and our people are seemingly afraid to be revolutionary. We are too “broadminded” to challenge what we do not believe in. We are afraid of being thought intolerant, uncouth, ungentlemanly. We have become lukewarm in our beliefs. And for that we perhaps merit the bitter condemnation stated in Revelation 3:16: “So then because thou art lukewarm, and neither cold nor hot, I will spue thee out of my mouth.” … In this dark hour, the fate of the world seems to rest largely in our hands. We who live in this choice land, in fact all of the land of Zion, have the opportunity, the responsibility, and the solemn obligation to stand firm for freedom and justice and morality—the dignity and brotherhood of man as a child of God. 313. David O. McKay, President of the Church, in Conference Report, April 1966, p. 109–110 In order that there may be no misunderstandings by bishops, stake presidents, and others regarding members of the Church participating in non-church meetings to study and become informed on the Constitution of the United States, Communism, etc., I wish to make the following statements that I have been sending out from my office for some time and that have come under question by some stake authorities, bishoprics, and others. Church members are at perfect liberty to act according to their own consciences in the matter of safeguarding our way of life. They are, of course, encouraged to honor the highest standards of the gospel and to work to preserve their own freedoms. They are free to participate in non-church meetings that are held to warn people of the threat of Communism or any other theory or principle that will deprive us of our free agency or individual liberties vouchsafed by the Constitution of the United States. The Church, out of respect for the rights of all its members to have their political views and loyalties, must maintain the strictest possible neutrality. We have no intention of trying to interfere with the fullest and freest exercise of the political franchise of our members under and within our Constitution, which the Lord declared he established “by the hands of wise men whom [he] raised up unto this very purpose” (D&C 101:80) and which, as to the principles thereof, the Prophet Joseph Smith, dedicating the Kirtland Temple, prayed should be “established forever.” (D&C 109:54.) The Church does not yield any of its devotion to or convictions about safeguarding the American principles and the establishments of government under federal and state constitutions and the civil rights of men safeguarded by these. The position of this Church on the subject of Communism has never changed. We consider it the greatest Satanical threat to peace, prosperity, and the spread of God’s work among men that exists on the face of the earth. In this connection, we are continually being asked to give our opinion concerning various patriotic groups or individuals who are fighting Communism and speaking up for freedom. Our immediate concern, however, is not with parties, groups, or persons, but with principles. We therefore commend and encourage every person and every group who is sincerely seeking to study Constitutional principles and awaken a sleeping and apathetic people to the alarming conditions that are rapidly advancing about us. We wish all of our citizens throughout the land were participating in some type of organized self-education in order that they could better appreciate what is happening and know what they can do about it. Supporting the FBI, the police, the congressional committees investigating Communism, and various organizations that are attempting to awaken the people through educational means is a policy we warmly endorse for all our people. The entire concept and philosophy of Communism is diametrically opposed to everything for which the Church stands—belief in Deity, belief in the dignity and eternal nature of man, and the application of the gospel to efforts for peace in the world. Communism is militantly atheistic and is committed to the destruction of faith wherever it may be found. The Russian Commissar of Education wrote: “We must hate Christians and Christianity. Even the best of them must be considered our worst enemies. Christian love is an obstacle to the development of the revolution. Down with love for one’s neighbor. What we want is hate. Only then shall we conquer the universe.” On the other hand, the gospel teaches the existence of God as our Eternal and Heavenly Father and declares: “… him only shalt thou serve.” (Matt. 4:10.) Communism debases the individual and makes him the enslaved tool of the state, to which he must look for sustenance and religion. Communism destroys man’s God-given free agency. No member of this Church can be true to his faith, nor can any American be loyal to his trust, while lending aid, encouragement or sympathy to any of these false philosophies, for if he does they will prove snares to his feet. 314. First Presidency Statement, in Improvement Era, vol. 39 (August 1936), p. 488 With great regret we learn from credible sources, governmental and others, that a few Church members are joining directly or indirectly, the Communists and are taking part in their activities. The Church does not interfere, and has no intention of trying to interfere, with the fullest and freest exercise of the political franchise of its members, under and within our Constitution which the Lord declared: “I established … by the hands of wise men whom I raised up unto this very purpose,” and which, as to the principles thereof, the Prophet, dedicating the Kirtland Temple, prayed should be “established forever.” But Communism is not a political party nor a political plan under the Constitution; it is a system of government that is the opposite of our Constitutional government, and it would be necessary to destroy our government before Communism could be set up in the United States. Since Communism, established, would destroy our American Constitutional government, to support Communism is treasonable to our free institutions, and no patriotic American citizen may become either a Communist or supporter of Communism. … Furthermore, it is charged by universal report, which is not successfully contradicted or disproved, that Communism undertakes to control, if not indeed to proscribe the religious life of the people living within its jurisdiction, and that it even reaches its hand into the sanctity of the family circle itself, disrupting the normal relationship of parent and child, all in a manner unknown and unsanctioned under the Constitutional guarantees under which we in America live. Such interference would be contrary to the fundamental precepts of the Gospel and to the teachings and order of the Church. Communism being thus hostile to loyal American citizenship and incompatible with true Church membership, of necessity no loyal American citizen and no faithful Church member can be a Communist. We call upon all Church members completely to eschew Communism. The safety of our divinely inspired Constitutional government and the welfare of our Church imperatively demand that Communism shall have no place in America. 315. Richard Arens, Staff Director of the House Committee on Un-American Activities, “Issues Presented by the Air Reserve Training Manual” (Hearings), House Committee on Un-American Activities, Congressional Record (1960) Thus far of the leadership of the National Council of Churches of Christ in America, we have found over 100 persons in leadership capacity with either communist-front records or records of service to communist causes. The aggregate affiliations of the leadership, instead of being in the hundreds as first indicated, is now, according to the latest count, into the thousands, and we have yet to complete our check, which would certainly suggest, on the basis of authoritative sources of this committee, that the statement that there is infiltration of fellow travelers in churches and educational institutions is a complete understatement. 316. Robert Doty, New York Times (1965) The head of the powerful Jesuit Order (Father Pedro Arrupe) charged today (Sept. 27) that atheism constitutes a conspiracy that has infiltrated even the Roman Catholic Church and virtually controls international organizations, finance, and mass communications. … [Father Pedro Arrupe said that] “the new godless society operates in an extremely efficient manner, at least in its higher levels of leadership. It makes use of every possible means at its disposal, be they scientific, technical, social, or economic. It follows a perfectly mapped-out strategy. It holds almost complete sway in international organizations, in financial circles, in the field of mass communications: press, cinema, radio, and television.” … Father Arrupe, as head of the 36,000-member Jesuit Order, is considered to be one of the half-dozen most influential churchmen in the world, as indicated by his informal title of “Black Pope.” 317. Charles Chiniquy, Ex-Catholic Priest, Fifty Years in the Church of Rome (Chick Publications), p. 283 Long before I was ordained a priest, I knew that my church was the most implacable enemy of this republic. My professors … had been unanimous in telling me that the principles and laws of the Church of Rome were absolutely antagonistic to the principles which are the foundation stones of the Constitution of the Unites States of America. 318. Richard Thompson, The Papacy and the Civil Power, in Fifty Years in the Church of Rome (Chick Publications), p. 285 Nothing is plainer than that, if the principles of the church of Rome prevail here, our Constitution would fall. The two cannot exist together. They are in open and direct antagonism with the fundamental theory of our government and of all popular government everywhere. 10. //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Today the path to total dictatorship in the United States can be laid by strictly legal means, unseen and unheard by Congress, the President, or the people. … We have a well-organized political-action group in this country, determined to destroy our Constitution and establish a one-party state. … [It has a] foothold within our Government, and its own propaganda apparatus. … One may call this group by many names. Some people call it socialism, some communism, some collectivism. I prefer to call it “democratic centralism.” … The important point to remember about this group is not its ideology, but its organization. It is a dynamic, aggressive, elite corps, forcing its way through every opening, to make a breach for a collectivist one-party state. It operates secretly, silently, continuously to transform our Government without our suspecting the change is under way. … This secret revolutionary corps understands well the power to influence the people … by an elegant form of brainwashing. … We see this, for example, in the innocent use of words like “democracy” in place of “representative government.” … It conducts tactical retreats but only the more surely to advance its own secret goal. … I know … of the Alger Hisses who planned it that way. … Dr. Wirt, of my state, told us in 1934 that the plans were all drawn, the timetable established. … The revolutionary cabal and its allies … designed the overall strategy. They broke the whole up into precisely measured parts and carefully timed moves, which appeared to be wholly unrelated. … Someone, somewhere, conceived the brilliant strategy of revolution by assembly line. The pattern for total revolution was divided into separate parts, each of them as innocent, safe and familiar looking as possible. But … when the parts of a design are carefully cut to exact size, to fit other parts with a perfect fit in the final assembly, the parts must be made according to a blueprint drawn up in exact detail. The men who make the blueprints know exactly what the final product is to be. … This assembly line revolution is like a time-bomb. … It is ready to go off, but it is not going to be set off until the time is ripe, until a switch is pulled. The switch is not to be pulled until the American people are conditioned or convinced that resistance is hopeless.//%Author%Senator William Jenner//%Source%speaking in support of the Bricker Amendment, Congressional Record (1954)//%end% 12. //%Author%William H. McIlhany, “Two Centuries of Intrigue,” The New American, vol. 12, no. 19 (Appleton: American Opinion Publishing Incorporated, 16 Sep. 1996), pp. 35–37 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Down through the ages there have been many secret societies and conspiratorial movements that had as their goals the absolute overthrow of all existing governments, and the final destruction of all religion. … Adam Weishaupt, a professor of Canon Law at the University of Ingolstadt (in Bavaria, Germany) established a continuing organizational structure to direct the worldwide attack on religion and monarchy—a structure which would, he hoped, eventually rule the world. The organization Weishaupt founded on May 1, 1776 was called the Order of the Illuminati. Weishaupt planned for the Order to maintain publicly the image of a charitable and philanthropic organization. It was this image which attracted many German educators and Protestant clergymen to the Order. When they joined they were convinced that the goal of the Order was the purest form of Christianity, to make of all mankind “one happy and prosperous family.” Once enlisted as novices or “Minervals” in the Order, those who were prepared for deeper commitment were allowed to advance to the rank of Illuminatus Minor, where they were told that the only obstruction to the Order’s goal of universal happiness was the power being held by the religious and governmental institutions of the world. Accordingly, the leaders of these institutions—monarchs (or future monarchs) and clergymen—had either to be brought under the control of the Order or destroyed. If such a prospect frightened the new Illuminatus Minor, he was kept inactive at this level until his ethnical concepts were altered. As Weishaupt stated, “These [ruling] powers are despots when they do not conduct themselves by its [the Order’s] principles; and it is therefore our duty to surround them with its members, so that the profane may have no access to them. Thus we are able most powerfully to promote its [the Order’s] interests. If any person is more disposed to listen to Princes than to the Order, he is not fit for it, and must rise no higher. We must do our utmost to procure the advancement of Illuminati into all important civil offices.” After the candidate had proven his absolute devotion to the secrets of the Order, he was allowed to enter the top-level circle of initiates as an Illuminatus Major, just below the position of Rex held by Weishaupt. By now, all conventional idealism had been purged from the candidate and he was told about the real objectives of the Order: rule of the world, to be accomplished after the destruction of all existing governments and religions. He was now required to take an oath which bound his every thought and action, and his fate, to the administration of his superiors in the Order. But Weishaupt did not simply rely on the sincerity of his disciples. He set up an elaborate spy network so that all members would constantly be checking on the loyalty of each other. The secret police of the Order killed anyone who tried to inform the authorities about the conspiracy. This band was known as the “Insinuating Brethren” and had as its insignia an all-seeing eye. The structure of the Order was pyramidal, with Weishaupt at the top. Beneath him were two or three immediate subordinates, each of whom had three men under his orders; each of those three had several men who carried out his dictates; and so on. In their correspondence, Illuminists were required to use code names for themselves. Weishaupt called himself Spartacus; others were Cato, Marius, Brutus, Pythagoras, Socrates, and Hannibal. Weishaupt, who had been raised and educated by the Jesuits before rebelling against them, adopted much of the organizational system of the Jesuits for his Order. As a reward for selling himself totally to the Order, the top-level Illuminatus (of which there were few) was granted all the material and sensual benefits that could possibly be obtained. Weishaupt intended that “the power of the Order must be turned to the advantage of its members. All must be assisted. They must be preferred to all persons otherwise of equal merit. Money, services, honor, goods, and blood must be expended for the fully proved brethren.” This intricate conspiratorial structure among the economic, social, political, and cultural elite in Bavaria was tremendously successful: Within two years after the founding of the Order, all but two of the professorial chairs at the University of Ingolstadt were held by members of the Order. Furthermore, it is estimated that before 1789 there were at least 2,000 members of the Order in the German-speaking lands. many of these were ministers, lawyers, doctors, and even a few princes. None were members of the lower classes, the agricultural working masses, or the serfs. The influence of the Order on German education and the German clergy was devastating. By 1800 many German ministers no longer believed the basic tenets of Christian doctrine. They had been converted to the worship of “reason.” The original writings of the Order included detailed instructions for fomenting hatred and bloodshed between different racial, religious, and ethnic groups—and even between the sexes. The idea of promoting hatred between children and their parents was introduced. There were even instructions about the kinds of buildings to be burned in urban insurrections. In short, virtually every tactic employed by 20th-century subversives was planned and written down by Adam Weishaupt over 200 years ago. It was not until the summer of 1782 that the Order really began to grow in power and influence outside Bavaria. Having already contemplated the possibility of infiltrating the freemasonic bodies of Western Europe and then taking control of them, Weishaupt and his brilliant disciple, Baron Adolf von Knigge (Philo), at last had their chance. During that summer, leaders and delegates of the continental European freemasonic bodies met in a congress held in Wilhelmsbad. Acting as Weishaupt’s agent, von Knigge joined them and offered enticing promises of the secrets that the Illuminati had to offer. Von Knigge persuaded many of the German and French delegates to join Weishaupt’s movement, and they extended the influence of the Order into their individual lodges. The two leaders of German freemasonry, Duke Ferdinand of Brunswick and Prince Karl of Hesse, joined the Order, thus bringing the whole of German freemasonry under the control of the Illuminati. Another important new disciple was the French Count Honoré Gabriel Mirabeau, who was brought into the Order while in Germany and who was chosen to take Weishaupt’s system to France. Among Mirabeau’s most important recruits were the Duke of Orléans (Philippe Egalité), Brissot, Condercet, Savalette, Grégoire, Garat, Pétion, Babeuf, Barnave, Sieyes, Saint-Just, Desmoulins, Hébert, Santerre, Danton, Marat, Chenier, and just about every other leader in the impending French Revolution. … The French Revolution was not a spontaneous uprising of the oppressed masses. … The upheaval was not a chance event, but an orchestrated effort to create a new political order. The siege of the Bastille on July 14, 1789, an event which has been persistently misrepresented and romanticized, was an excellent example of how the Illuminati stage-managed the events of the French Revolution. … Not surprisingly, the clergy was singled out as an object of relentless persecution and eventual extermination. Churches were profaned and prostitutes were worshiped on their altars. The campaign to de-Christianize France included even the creation of a new calendar stripped of religious significance. Assaults were mounted against religious education, and the first conscription for military service was put into effect. The rule of civil government and authority in Paris dropped to an unprecedented low during the Reign of Terror which began in 1794. … Just before his execution in 1794, the Illuminist Robespierre, who had presided over much of the Terror, advocated the systematic extermination of 15 million Frenchmen so that the remaining food supplies would be adequate. Although this prototype ecological “depopulation” program was not fully implemented, the Terror did extinguish the lives of at least 3000,000 Frenchmen—297,000 of whom were members of the middle and lower agricultural and working classes. As always, the “people’s revolution” primarily victimized its alleged beneficiaries. … The U.S. was established as a constitutional republic in 1789, the same year the Illuminati’s devastation of France began. Shortly thereafter, agents of the Illuminati, such as French agitator Edward Genet, began organizing insurrectionary and secessionist movements to destroy the American Republic. There efforts were delayed by widespread public exposure, thanks in no small measure to George Washington, who condemned “the nefarious, and dangerous plan, and doctrines of the Illuminati....” Another memorable warning was offered in a July 4, 1799 address by Timothy Dwight, president of Yale College. By 1815, Weishaupt’s ambassadors had begun to extend their influence into many parts of the world beyond Bavaria and France. Among the personages and organizations responsible for extending the Illuminati’s infiltration and power throughout Europe were Filippo Michele Buonarroti and his Sublimes Maitres Parfaits (Sublime Perfect Masters), and Louis Auguste Blanqui and the Société des Saisons (Society of the Seasons). Those two branches of the Illuminati formed the source of the League of the Just, which commissioned Karl Marx to write the Communist Manifesto in 1848. Following publication of the Manifesto, the League of the Just changed its name to the Communist League. The Illuminists provided the unseen hand behind the staged communist revolts of 1848, which convulsed France, Austria-Hungary, and Russia. This inaugurated the era of communist subversion, infiltration, and control of governments across the globe—an era which has not ended, contrary to “polite” opinion. As James H. Billington, a respected scholar who is now the Librarian of Congress, illustrates in his exhaustively documented 1980 study Fire in the Minds of Men: The Origins of the Revolutionary Faith, it is from “Bavarian Illuminism” that “the modern revolutionary tradition” descends. Among the subversive and revolutionary 19th and early 20th century movements created by the Illuminati (primarily through European Grand Orient freemasonry, not British and American freemasonry) were the Marxian and “utopian” socialist movements; anarchism; syndicalism; Pan Slavism; Irish, Italian and German “nationalism”; German Imperialism; the Paris Commune; British “New Imperialism”; Fabian Socialism; and Leninist Bolshevism. 13. //%Author%Timothy Dwight, President of Yale University, 4 July 1798, “The Duty of Americans, At the Present Crisis,” Political Sermons of the American Founding Era: 1730-1805, 2nd Edition (Indianapolis: Liberty Fund, 1998), vol. 2, part 5. //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Doctor Adam Weishaupt, professor of the canon law in the University of Ingolstadt, a city of Bavaria (in Germany) formed, about the year 1777, the order of Illuminati. This order is professedly a higher order of Masons, originated by himself, and grafted on ancient Masonic institutions. The secrecy, solemnity, mysticism, and correspondence of Masonry, were in this new order preserved and enhanced; while the ardor of innovation, the impatience of civil and moral restraints, and the aims against government, morals, and religion, were elevated, expanded, and rendered more systematical, malignant, and daring. In the societies of Illuminati doctrines were taught, which strike at the root of all human happiness and virtue; and every such doctrine was either expressly or implicitly involved in their system. The being of God was denied and ridiculed. Government was asserted to be a curse, and authority a mere usurpation. Civil society was declared to be the only apostasy of man. The possession of property was pronounced to be robbery. Chastity and natural affection were declared to be nothing more than groundless prejudices. Adultery, assassination, poisoning, and other crimes of the like infernal nature, were taught as lawful, and even as virtuous actions. To crown such a system of falsehood and horror all means were declared to be lawful, provided the end was good. In this last doctrine men are not only loosed from every bond, and from every duty; but from every inducement to perform any thing which is good, and, abstain from any thing which is evil; and are set upon each other, like a company of hellhounds to worry, rend, and destroy. Of the goodness of the end every man is to judge for himself; and most men, and all men who resemble the Illuminati, will pronounce every end to be good, which will gratify their inclinations. The great and good ends proposed by the Illuminati, as the ultimate objects of their union, are the overthrow of religion, government, and human society civil and domestic. These they pronounce to be so good, that murder, butchery, and war, however extended and dreadful, are declared by them to be completely justifiable, if necessary for these great purposes. With such an example in view, it will be in vain to hunt for ends, which can be evil. The names by which this society was enlarged, and its doctrines spread, were of every promising kind. With unremitted ardor and diligence the members insinuated themselves into every place of power and trust, and into every literary, political and friendly society; engrossed as much as possible the education of youth, especially of distinction; became licensers of the press, and directors of every literary journal; waylaid every foolish prince, every unprincipled civil officer, and every abandoned clergyman; entered boldly into the desk, and with unhallowed hands, and satanic lips, polluted the pages of God; enlisted in their service almost all the booksellers, and of course the printers, of Germany; inundated the country with books, replete with infidelity, irreligion, immorality, and obscenity; prohibited the printing, and prevented the sale, of books of the contrary character; decried and ridiculed them when published in spite of their efforts; panegyrized and trumpeted those of themselves and their coadjutors; and in a word made more numerous, more diversified, and more strenuous exertions, than an active imagination would have preconceived. To these exertions their success has been proportioned. Multitudes of the Germans, notwithstanding the gravity, steadiness, and sobriety of their national character, have become either partial or entire converts to these wretched doctrines; numerous societies have been established among them; the public faith and morals have been unhinged; and the political and religious affairs of that empire have assumed an aspect, which forebodes its total ruin. In France, also, Illuminatism has been eagerly and extensively adopted; and those men, who have had, successively, the chief direction of the public affairs of that country, have been members of this society. Societies have also been erected in Switzerland and Italy, and have contributed probably to the success of the French, and to the overthrow of religion and government, in those countries. Mentz was delivered up to Custine by the Illuminati; and that general appears to have been guillotined, because he declined to encourage the same treachery with respect to Manheim. Nor have England and Scotland escaped the contagion. Several societies have been erected in both of those countries. Nay in the private papers, seized in the custody of the leading members in Germany, several such societies are recorded as having been erected in America, before the year 1786. It is a remarkable fact, that a large proportion of the sentiments, here stated, have been publicly avowed and applauded in the French legislature. The being and providence of God have been repeatedly denied and ridiculed. Christ has been mocked with the grossest insult. Death, by a solemn legislative decree has been declared to be an eternal sleep. Marriage has been degraded to a farce, and the community, by the law of divorce, invited to universal prostitution. In the school of public instruction atheism is professedly taught; and at an audience before the legislature, Nov. 30, 1793, the head scholar declared, that he and his schoolfellows detested a God; a declaration received by the members with unbounded applause, and rewarded with the fraternal kiss of the president, and with the honors of the sitting. 21. //%Author%Reed Smoot of the Quorum of the Twelve Apostles, in Conference Report, April 1933, p. 20 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%We are living in trying times—international struggles are imminent—”Nation rising against Nation” for supremacy and existence. Civilized governments are threatened by internal and destructive agencies in the form of Communism. This secret organization assumes different names and forms. It is Communism in France, Socialism in Germany, Internationalism in Spain and Italy, Nihilism in Russia, and similar sentiments and principles are cloaked under a variety of titles in America and Great Britain. All these organizations are opposed in spirit to all the restraints of law and order. Now let me call your attention to the fact that in February, 1831, Joseph Smith received a revelation on this very subject, which no doubt many of you are familiar with. Reference is also made along the same lines in the Book of Mormon. Secularism and infidelity are sweeping over the world; millions are indulging in every kind of iniquity. Crime is increasing with such rapidity that the large cities of the world find it next to impossible to cope with it. I know that it is easier to point out evils than the particular way of destroying them. I know it will take the united effort of honest, patriotic, liberty loving citizens, to meet the situation. The churches must play an important part. The Church of Jesus Christ has never ceased its opposition to organizations such as I have mentioned and never will. 22. //%Author%John Taylor, President of the Church, 9 Oct. 1881, in Journal of Discourses, vol. 22, p. 297 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%We want nothing like communism, or nihilism, or any of the outrageous infamies that are beginning to vex and perplex the nations. Yet these things will roll on until it will be a vexation to hear the reports thereof, and unless this nation speedily turns round God’s hand will be upon them; unless the speedily adhere to the principles of equal rights and freedom, He will be after them. Now, you can set that down if you like and see whether it will come to pass or not. 23. //%Author%Ezra Taft Benson of the Quorum of the Twelve Apostles, “Civic Standards for the Faithful Saints,” Ensign, vol. 2, no. 7 (Salt Lake City: The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, July 1972), pp. 60–61; the third paragraph did not appear in the Ensign or Conference Report, but can be found in the audio/video copy held at the Church Archives, a copy of which, I, the compiler, have in my possession //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Joseph Smith said that the Book of Mormon was the “keystone of our religion” and the “most correct” book on earth. (DHC, vol. 6, p. 56.) This most correct book on earth states that the downfall of two great American civilizations came as a result of secret conspiracies whose desire was to overthrow the freedom of the people. “And they have caused the destruction of this people of whom I am now speaking,” says Moroni, “and also the destruction of the people of Nephi.” (Eth. 8:21.) Now undoubtedly Moroni could have pointed out many factors that led to the destruction of the people, but he singled out the secret combinations, just as the Church today could point out many threats to peace, prosperity, and the spread of God’s work, but it has singled out the greatest threat as the godless conspiracy. There is no conspiracy theory in the Book of Mormon—it is a conspiracy fact. And along this line, I would highly recommend to you a new book entitled None Dare Call it Conspiracy, by Gary Allen. Then Moroni speaks to us in this day and says, “Wherefore, the Lord commandeth you, when ye shall see these things come among you that ye shall awake to a sense of your awful situation, because of this secret combination which shall be among you. …” (Eth. 8:24.) The Book of Mormon further warns that “whatsoever nation shall uphold such secret combinations, to get power and gain, until they shall spread over the nation, behold they shall be destroyed. …” (Eth. 8:22.) This scripture should alert us to what is ahead unless we repent, because there is no question but that as people of the free world, we are increasingly upholding many of the evils of the adversary today. By court edict godless conspirators can run for government office, teach in our schools, hold office in labor unions, work in our defense plants, serve n our merchant marines, etc. As a nation, we are helping to underwrite many evil revolutionaries in our country. Now we are assured that the Church will remain on the earth until the Lord comes again—but at what price? The Saints in the early days were established in Jackson County, but look at what their unfaithfulness cost them in bloodshed and delay. 24. //%Author%Moses Thatcher of the Quorum of the Twelve Apostles, 16 June 1882, in an address in Franklin, Idaho, Franklin Ward Historical Record //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%I have seen the end of this nation and it is terrible. … I will tell you in the name of the Lord that a secret band will sap the life of this nation. 25. //%Author%Ezra Taft Benson of the Quorum of the Twelve Apostles, in Conference Report, October 1960, p. 104 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%The ancient American Prophet Moroni saw our day. Who can doubt that he had in mind the evils of godless communism when he gave this solemn warning: “Wherefore, O ye Gentiles, it is wisdom in God that these things should be shown unto you, that thereby ye may repent of your sins, and suffer not that these murderous combinations shall get above you, which are built up to get power and gain—and the work, yea, even the work of destruction come upon you, yea, even the sword of the justice of the Eternal God shall fall upon you, to your overthrow and destruction if ye shall suffer these things to be. “Wherefore, the Lord commandeth you, when ye shall see these things come among you that ye shall awake to a sense of your awful situation, because of this secret combination which shall be among you; or wo be unto it, because of the blood of them who have been slain; for they cry from the dust for vengeance upon it, and also upon those who built it up. “For it cometh to pass that whoso buildeth it up seeketh to overthrow the freedom of all lands, nations, and countries; and it bringeth to pass the destruction of all people, for it is built up by the devil, who is the father of all lies.” (Ether 8:23-25.) We are eminently justified in declaring that we should consider any attempt on the part of the communists to extend their system to any part of this hemisphere as dangerous to our peace and safety. 26. //%Author%David O. McKay, President of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, in Conference Report, April 1962, p. 125 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Men today are rapidly classifying themselves into two groups: believers and nonbelievers. J. Edgar Hoover, and I quote, says: “There is no place here in America for part-time patriots. This nation is face to face with the greatest danger ever to confront it, a sinister and deadly conspiracy which can be conquered only by an alert, informed citizenry. It is indeed appalling that some members of our society continue to deplore and criticize those who stress the communist danger. Public indifference to this threat is tantamount to national suicide. Lethargy leads only to disaster. Knowledge of the enemy, alertness to the danger, everyday patriotism are the brick and mortar with which we can build an impregnable fortress against communism.” 28. //%Author%David O. McKay, President of the Church, in Conference Report, April 1966, pp. 109–110 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%The position of this Church on the subject of Communism has never changed. We consider it the greatest Satanical threat to peace, prosperity, and the spread of God’s work among men that exists on the face of the earth. 29. //%Author%David O. McKay, President of the Church, in Conference Report, October 1959, pp. 4–9 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%On the fly-leaf of the book, The Naked Communist, by W. Cleon Skousen, we find this quotation, (and I admonish everybody to read that excellent book of Chief Skousen’s): “The conflict between communism and freedom is the problem of our time. It overshadows all other problems. This conflict mirrors our age, its toils, its tensions, its troubles, and its tasks. On the outcome of this conflict depends the future of mankind.” 32. //%Author%Ezra Taft Benson of the Quorum of the Twelve, “McCarthy in Retrospect,” Freemen Report //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Senator Joseph R. McCarthy, whom I knew and admired, was essentially correct in the claims he made about the Communist threat to America. His most vocal enemies hated and feared him, not because of what he could do to them, but because they knew he was telling the truth about them. Had he been wrong, he would likely have been ignored. He was not vilified because he “smeared innocent people,” but because he identified and exposed guilty ones. Fortunately, an increasing number of Americans now recognize that McCarthy was on the right track, and that our nation has suffered serious injury because we failed to heed his warning voice. At Senator McCarthy’s funeral, Dr. Frederick Brown Harris, the Chaplain of the Senate, asserted: “This fallen warrior through death speaketh, calling a nation of free men to be delivered from the complacency of a false security and from regarding those who loudly sound the trumpets of vigilance and alarm as mere disturbers of the peace.” Joseph McCarthy’s fight was the fight for America. That same fight is going on under even more trying circumstances today, and each of us owes it to our God, our family, and our country to preserve until victory is achieved. [signed] Ezra Taft Benson, Former Sec. of Agriculture 34. //%Author%Ezra Taft Benson of the Quorum of the Twelve Apostles, in Conference Report, October 1961, p. 69–72 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Concerning the United States, the Lord revealed to his prophets that its greatest threat would be a vast, worldwide “secret combination” which would not only threaten the United States but also seek to “overthrow the freedom of all lands, nations, and countries.” (Ether 8:25.) … In connection with attack on the United States, the Lord told the Prophet Joseph Smith there would be an attempt to overthrow the country by destroying the Constitution. Joseph Smith predicted that the time would come when the Constitution would hang, as it were, by a thread, and at that time “this people will step forth and save it from the threatened destruction.” (Journal History, Brigham Young’s Speech, July 4, 1854.) … One of the most urgent, heart-stirring appeals made by Moroni as he closed the Book of Mormon was addressed to the gentile nations of the last days. He foresaw the rise of a great world-wide secret combination among the gentiles which “… seeketh to overthrow the freedom of all lands, nations, and countries; …” (Ether 8:25. Italics added.) He warned each gentile nation of the last days to purge itself of this gigantic criminal conspiracy which would seek to rule the world. The prophets, in our day, have continually warned us of these internal threats in our midst—that our greatest threat from socialistic-communism lies within our country. Brethren and sisters, we don’t need a prophet—we have one—we need a listening ear. And if we do not listen and heed, then, as the Doctrine and Covenants states, “… the day cometh that they who will not hear the voice of the Lord, neither the voice of his servants, neither give heed to the words of the prophets and apostles, shall be cut off from among the people.” (D&C 1:14.) The prophets have said that these threats are among us. The Prophet Moroni, viewing our day, said, “Wherefore the Lord commandeth you, when ye shall see these things come among you that ye shall awake to a sense of your awful situation.” (Ether 8:24.) Unfortunately our nation has not treated the socialistic-communist conspiracy as “treasonable to our free institutions,” as the First Presidency pointed out in a signed 1936 statement. If we continue to uphold communism by not making it treasonable, our land shall be destroyed, for the Lord has said that “… whatsoever nation shall uphold such secret combinations, to get power and gain, until they shall spread over the nation, behold they shall be destroyed; …” (Ibid., 8:22.) The Prophet Moroni described how the secret combination would take over a country and then fight the work of God, persecute the righteous, and murder those who resisted. Moroni therefore proceeded to describe the workings of the ancient “secret combinations” so that modern man could recognize this great political conspiracy in the last days: “Wherefore, O ye Gentiles, it is wisdom in God that these things should be shown unto you, that thereby ye may repent of your sins, and suffer not that these murderous combinations shall get above you, which are built up to get power and gain—and the work, yea, even the work of destruction come upon you. “Wherefore, the Lord commandeth you, when ye shall see these things come among you that ye shall awake to a sense of your awful situation, because of this secret combination which shall be among you; … “For it cometh to pass that whoso buildeth it up seeketh to overthrow the freedom of all lands, nations and countries; and it bringeth to pass the destruction of all people, for it is built up by the devil, who is the father of all lies; …” (Ibid., 8:23-25. Italics added.) The Prophet Moroni seemed greatly exercised lest in our day we might not be able to recognize the startling fact that the same secret societies which destroyed the Jaredites and decimated numerous kingdoms of both Nephites and Lamanites would be precisely the same form of criminal conspiracy which would rise up among the gentile nations in this day. The stratagems of the leaders of these societies are amazingly familiar to anyone who has studied the tactics of modern communist leaders. The Lord has declared that before the second coming of Christ it will be necessary to “… destroy the secret works of darkness, …” in order to preserve the land of Zion—the Americas. (2 Nephi 10:11-16.) The world-wide secret conspiracy which has risen up in our day to fulfill these prophecies is easily identified. President McKay has left no room for doubt as to what attitude Latter-day Saints should take toward the modern “secret combinations” of conspiratorial communism. In a lengthy statement on communism, he said: “… Latter-day Saints should have nothing to do with the secret combinations and groups antagonistic to the constitutional law of the land, which the Lord ‘suffered to be established,’ and which ‘should be maintained for the rights and protection of all flesh according to just and holy principles.’.” (Gospel Ideals, by David O. McKay, p. 306. Italics added.) … 35. //%Author%John Taylor, President of the Church, 3 July 1881, Journal of Discourses, vol. 22, pp. 142–144 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%I am sorry to see this murderous influence prevailing throughout the world, and perhaps this may be a fitting occasion to refer to some of these matters. The manifestations of turbulence and uneasiness which prevail among the nations of the earth are truly lamentable. Well, have I anything to do with them? Nothing; but I cannot help but know that they exist. These feelings which tend to do away with all right, rule, and government, and correct principles are not from God, or many of them are not. This feeling of communism and nihilism, aimed at the overthrow of rulers and men in position and authority, arises from a spirit of diabolism, which is contrary to every principle of the Gospel of the Son of God. But then do not the Scriptures say that these things shall occur? Yes. Do not the scriptures say that men shall grow worse and worse, deceiving and being deceived? Yes. Do not the scriptures tell us that thrones shall be cast down and empires destroyed and the rule and government of the earth be trodden under foot? Yes. But I cannot help but sympathize with those who suffer from their influences; while these afflictions are the result of wickedness and corruption, yet we cannot shut our eyes to the fact that those who engage in these pernicious practices are exceedingly low, brutal, wicked and degraded. I would say “my soul come not thou into their secret; unto their assembly, mine honor, be not thou united.” … I feel more profoundly moved that deeds of this description can occur in a free, liberal and enlightened government like this. We might expect such things in some of the European nations where the principles of nihilism exist to so great an extent, and where there seems a disposition to subvert all rule and government and place the people and nations in the hands of irresponsible mobs, and of low, brutal, murderous men, without any regard to the principles of law, order, justice, equity and righteousness. I could account for some of these things taking place there. It is really astonishing to see what efforts are being made to accomplish the overthrow of rule and government in Russia, Austria, Germany, Spain, England, Italy, France, Turkey, etc. These things are beginning to spread among and permeate the nations of the earth. Do we expect them? Yes. These secret combinations were spoken of by Joseph Smith, years and years ago. I have heard him time and time again tell about them, and he stated that when these things began to take place the liberties of this nation would begin to be bartered away. We see many signs of weakness which we lament, and we would to God that our rulers would be men of righteousness, and that those who aspire to position would be guided by honorable feelings—to maintain inviolate the Constitution and operate in the interest, happiness, well-being, and protection of the whole community. But we see signs of weakness and vacillation. We see a policy being introduced to listen to the clamor of mobs and of unprincipled men who know not of what they speak, nor whereof they affirm, and when men begin to tear away with impunity one plank after another from our Constitution, by and by we shall find that we are struggling with the wreck and ruin of the system which the forefathers of this nation sought to establish in the interests of humanity. But it is for us still to sustain these glorious principles of liberty bequeathed by the founders of this nation, still to rally round the flag of the Union, still to maintain all correct principles, granting the utmost extent of liberty to all people of all grades and of all nations. If other people see fit to violate these sacred principles, we must uphold them in their entirety, in their purity, and be patriotic and law-abiding and act honorably toward our nation and to its rulers. 36. //%Author%Marion G. Romney, Second Counselor in the First Presidency, “America’s Promise,” Ensign, vol. 9, no. 9 (Salt Lake City: The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, Sep. 1979), p. 5 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Communism is the greatest anti-Christ power in the world today and therefore the greatest menace not only to our peace but to our preservation as a free people. By the extent to which we tolerate it, accommodate ourselves to it, permit ourselves to be encircled by its tentacles and drawn to it, to that extent we forfeit the protection of the God of this land. 37. //%Author%Ezra Taft Benson, President of the Quorum of the Twelve Apostles, “Jesus Christ—Gifts and Expectations,” New Era, vol. 5, no. 5 (Salt Lake City: The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, May 1975), p. 19 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%And speaking of anti-Christ, if you want to get some idea of how we are flaunting the Constitution, see how the Constitution defines treason. Then observe what we are doing to build up the enemy, this totally anti-Christ conspiracy. If we continue on this tragic course of aid and trade to the enemy, the Lord has warned us of the consequences that will follow in chapter 8 of Ether in the Book of Mormon. 38. //%Author%Ezra Taft Benson, letter to Elder Bremer, 1 Aug. 1972, copy in possession of the compiler. //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Responding to your letter of July 24, may I suggest that you acquire a copy of Brother Cleon Skousen’s book The Naked Capitalist which treats much this same field. Also the book The Great and Abominable Church of the Devil by Verlan Anderson. Both of these are available at the Deseret Book Company, I believe, and seem to substantiate in large measure what Gary Allen has said in None Dare Call it Conspiracy. 39. //%Author%Ezra Taft Benson, 6 April 1972, as taken from the audio/video copy of his General Conference address, a copy of which was obtained by the compiler from the Archives of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%I would highly recommend to you a new book entitled None Dare Call it Conspiracy, by Gary Allen. 44. //%Author%First Presidency Statement, in Conference Report, October 1942, p. 15 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%We condemn the outcome which wicked and designing men are now planning, namely: the worldwide establishment and perpetuation of some form of Communism on the one side, or of some form of Nazism or Fascism on the other. Each of these systems destroys liberty, wipes out free institutions, blots out free agency, stifles free press and free speech, crushes out freedom of religion and conscience. Free peoples cannot and do not survive under these systems. Free peoples the world over will view with horror the establishment of either Communism or Nazism as a worldwide system. Each system is fostered by those who deny the right and the ability of the common people to govern themselves. We proclaim that the common people have both this right and this ability. 46. //%Author%Joseph Fielding Smith, in Conference Report, April 1950, p. 159 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Now I tell you it is time the people of the United States were waking up with the understanding that if they don’t save the Constitution from the dangers that threaten it, we will have a change of government. 55. //%Author%J. Reuben Clark, Jr., in Deseret News, “Church Section,” 25 September 1949, pp. 2, 15 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%The plain and simple issue now facing us in America is freedom or slavery. … Our real enemies are communism and its running mate, socialism. … And never forget for one moment that communism and socialism are state slavery. World conquest has been, is now, and ever will be its ultimate goal. … One thing seems sure, we will not get out of our present difficulties without trouble, serious trouble. Indeed, it may well be that our government and its free institutions will not be preserved except at the price of life and blood. 57. //%Author%J. Reuben Clark, Jr., in Improvement Era, May 1944 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%I say unto you with all the soberness I can, that we stand in danger of losing our liberties, and that once lost, only blood will bring them back; and once lost, we of this church will, in order to keep the church going forward, have more sacrifices to make and more persecutions to endure than we have yet known, heavy as our sacrifices and grievous as our persecutions of the past have been. We face a war to the death, a gigantic worldwide struggle. We must face it, enter it, take part in it. In fact, we are all taking part in the struggle, whether we will or not. Upon its final issue, liberty lives or dies. 119. //%Author%J. Reuben Clark, Jr., in Conference Report, October 1941, p. 16 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%I have been preaching against Communism for twenty years. I still warn you against it, and I tell you that we are drifting toward it more rapidly than some of us understand and I tell you that when Communism comes, the ownership of the things which are necessary to feed your families is going to be taken away from us. I tell you freedom of speech will go, freedom of the press will go, and freedom of religion will go. I have warned you against propaganda and hate. We are in the midst of the greatest exhibition of propaganda that the world has ever seen, and all directed toward one end. Just do not believe all you read. 134. //%Author%Ezra Taft Benson, President of the Quorum of the Twelve, BYU Address entitled “In His Steps,” 4 March 1979 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%The less newspapers have to say of value and of truth, the more pages they seem to take to say it. Usually a few minutes is more than sufficient to read a paper. One must select wisely a source of news; otherwise it would be better to be uninformed than misinformed. The subscribers of some mass magazines and newspapers are ever reading but seldom able to come to a knowledge of the truth in the areas of most vital concern. 144. //%Author%M. Russell Ballard, in Conference Report, October 2003 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Conspiring men and women, intent on gain rather than goodness, stir up the people to all manner of wickedness, preventing the noble uses to which the media could be employed. … The time has come when members of the Church need to speak out and join with the many other concerned people in opposition to the offensive, destructive, and mean-spirited media influence that is sweeping over the earth. 147. //%Author%J. Reuben Clark, Jr., in Deseret News, “Church Section,” 25 Sept. 1949, pp. 2, 15 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%If we do not vigorously fight for our liberties, we shall go clear through to the end of the road and become another Russia, or worse. 151. //%Author%Ezra Taft Benson, BYU Address, 10 Dec. 1963 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Let us have no blind devotion to the communist-dominated United Nations. 178. //%Author%Ezra Taft Benson, in BYU Address, 10 May 1966 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%“The adversary,” said Brigham Young, “presents his principle and arguments in the most approved style, and in the most winning tone, attended with the most graceful attitudes; and he is very careful to ingratiate himself into the favor of the powerful and influential of mankind, uniting himself with popular parties, floating into offices of trust and emolument by pandering to popular feeling, though it should seriously wrong and oppress the innocent.” Such characters put on the manners of an angel, appearing as nigh like angels of light as they possibly can, to deceive the innocent and the unwary. The good which they do, they do to bring to pass an evil purpose upon the good and honest followers of Jesus Christ. 190. //%Author%David O. McKay, in Conference Report, October 1962, p. 8 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Above all else, strive to support good and conscientious candidates of either party who are aware of the great dangers inherent in communism and who are truly dedicated to the Constitution in the tradition of our founding fathers. They should also pledge their sincere fealty to our way of liberty—a liberty which aims at the preservation of both personal and property rights. Study the issues, analyze the candidates on these grounds, and then exercise your franchise as free men and women. Never be found guilty of exchanging your birthright for a mess of pottage! 191. //%Author%Hyrum Smith, 9 April 1844, in History of the Church, vol. 6 (Salt Lake City), p. 323 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%We engage in the election the same as in any other principle: you are to vote for good men, and if you do not do this it is a sin: to vote for wicked men, it would be sin. Choose the good and refuse the evil. Men of false principles have preyed upon us like wolves upon helpless lambs. Damn the rod of tyranny; curse it. Let every man use his liberties according to the Constitution. Don’t fear man or devil; electioneer with all people, male and female, and exhort them to do the thing that is right. We want a President of the U. S., not a party President, but a President of the whole people; for a party President disfranchises the opposite party. Have a President who will maintain every man in his rights. 192. //%Author%J. Reuben Clark, Jr., The Improvement Era, vol. 43, no. 7 (July 1940), p. 444 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%God provided that in this land of liberty, our political allegiance shall run not to individuals, that is, to government officials, no matter how great or how small they may be. Under His plan our allegiance and the only allegiance we owe as citizens or denizens of the United States, runs to our inspired Constitution which God Himself set up. So runs the oath of office of those who participate in government. A certain loyalty we do owe to the office which a man holds, but even here we owe, just by reason of our citizenship, no loyalty to the man himself. In other countries it is to the individual that allegiance runs. This principle of allegiance to the Constitution is basic to our freedom. It is one of the great principles that distinguishes this “land of liberty” from other countries. Thus God added to His priceless blessings to us. I wish to say with all the earnestness I possess that when you youth and maidens see any curtailment of these liberties I have named, when you see government invading any of these realms of freedom which we have under our Constitution, you will know that they are putting shackles on your liberty, and that tyranny is creeping upon you, no matter who curtails these liberties or who invades these realms, and no matter what the reason and excuse therefore may be. 194. //%Author%Joseph Smith, in History of the Church, vol. 6 (Salt Lake City), p. 207 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Now it is time to have a President of the United States; and let the people of the whole Union, like the inflexible Romans, whenever they find a promise made by a candidate that is not practiced as an officer, hurl the miserable sycophant from his exaltation, as God did Nebuchadnezzar, to crop the grass of the field with a beast’s heart among the cattle. 195. //%Author%Truman G. Madsen, The Presidents of the Church, p. 372 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Which of the two main political parties in the United States is closest to the vision of the founders of the United States? Neither. 196. //%Author%Heber C. Kimball, First Counselor in the First Presidency, 13 Aug. 1853, in Journal of Discourses, vol. 2, p. 105 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%In the United States and in the old countries, they are divided into six or seven hundred different religious denominations, all disagreeing with each other; besides political and a thousand other kinds of divisions and differences, such as whiggery, democratism, socialism, which, in short, may all be summed up under the term, Devilism. This is not the policy of the Latter-day Saints. 199. //%Author%J. Reuben Clark, Jr., in Conference Report, April 1952, p. 80 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Brethren, I do not suppose that any of you have had communistic leanings. I suppose that all of you love your country, love the Constitution, love the free institutions under which we live, love our freedoms. But if there be any, may I ask you, prayerfully and humbly, think this thing over, because if it comes here it will probably come in its full vigor and there will be a lot of vacant places among those who guide and direct, not only this government, but also this Church of ours. 200. //%Author%Ezra Taft Benson, “A Witness and a Warning,” Ensign, November 1979 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%My message is a witness and a warning about some of the evils which threaten America—a land I love with all my heart. … Communism introduced into the world a substitute for true religion. It is a counterfeit of the gospel plan. The false prophets of Communism predict a utopian society. This, they proclaim, will only be brought about as capitalism and free enterprise are overthrow, private property abolished, the family as a social unit eliminated, all classes abolished, all governments overthrown, and a communal ownership of property in a classless, stateless society established. Since 1917 this godless counterfeit to the gospel has made tremendous progress toward its objective of world domination. Today, we are in a battle for the bodies and souls of man. It is a battle between two opposing systems: freedom and slavery, Christ and anti-Christ. The struggle is more momentous than a decade ago, yet today the conventional wisdom says, “You must learn to live with Communism and to give up your ideas about national sovereignty.” Tell that to the millions—yes, the scores of millions—who have met death or imprisonment under the tyranny of Communism! Such would be the death knell of freedom and all we hold dear. … I have seen the Soviet Union, under its godless leaders, spread its ideology throughout the world. Every stratagem is used—trade, war, revolution, violence, hate, detente, and immorality—to accomplish its purposes. Many nations are now under its oppressive control. Over one billion people—one-fourth of the population of the world—have now lost their freedom and are under Communist domination. We seem to forget that the great objective of Communism is still world domination and control, which means the surrender of our freedom—your freedom—our sovereignty. … President Marion G. Romney, in the First Presidency Message in the September 1979 Ensign, wrote: “Communism is Satan’s counterfeit for the gospel plan, and … it is an avowed enemy of the God of the land. Communism is the greatest anti-Christ power in the world today and therefore the greatest menace not only to our peace but to our preservation as a free people. By the extent to which we tolerate it, accommodate ourselves to it, permit ourselves to be encircled by its tentacles and drawn to it, to that extent we forfeit the protection of the God of this land” (p. 5). The truth is, we have to a great extent accommodated ourselves to Communism—and we have permitted ourselves to become encircled by its tentacles. Though we give lip service to the Monroe Doctrine, this has not prevented Cuba from becoming a Soviet military base, ninety miles off our coastline, nor has it prevented the takeover of Nicaragua in Central America, the surrender of the Panama Canal, or the infiltration by enemy agents within our borders. Never before has the land of Zion appeared so vulnerable to so powerful an enemy as the Americas do at present. And our vulnerability is directly attributable to our loss of active faith in the God of this land, who has decreed that we must worship Him or be swept off. Too many Americans have lost sight of the truth that God is our source of freedom—the Lawgiver—and that personal righteousness is the most important essential to preserving our freedom. So, I say with all the energy of my soul that unless we as citizens of this nation forsake our sins, political and otherwise, and return to the fundamental principles of Christianity and of constitutional government, we will lose our political liberties, our free institutions, and will stand in jeopardy before God. No nation which has kept the commandments of God has ever perished, but I say to you that once freedom is lost, only blood—human blood—will win it back. There are some things we must do at once if we are to stave off a holocaust of destruction. … We must awaken to “a sense of [our] awful situation, because of this secret combination which [is] among [us]” (Ether 8:24). We must not tolerate accommodation with or appeasement toward the false system of Communism. We must demand of our elected officials that we not only resist Communism, but that we will take every measure to prevent its intrusion into this hemisphere. … My single-minded concern is for the freedom and welfare of my countrymen and my posterity, the freedom of all men. 201. //%Author%J. Reuben Clark, Jr., in Deseret News, “Church Section,” 25 September 1949, pp. 2, 15 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%The paths we are following, if we move forward thereon, will inevitably lead us to socialism or communism, and these two are as like as two peas in a pod in their ultimate effect upon our liberties. … We may first observe that communism and socialism—which we shall hereafter group together and dub Statism—cannot live with Christianity nor with any religion that postulates a Creator such as the Declaration of Independence recognizes. The slaves of Statism must know no power, no authority, no source of blessing, no God, but the State. … This country faces ahead enough trouble to bring us to our knees in humble honest prayer to God for the help which He alone can give to save us. … Do not think that all these usurpations, intimidations, and impositions are being done to us through inadvertency or mistake, the whole course is deliberately planned and carried out; its purpose is to destroy the Constitution and our Constitutional government; then to bring chaos out of which the new Statism, with its Slavery, is to arise, with a cruel, relentless, selfish, ambitious crew in the saddle, riding hard with whip and spur, a red-shrouded band of night riders for despotism. … If we do not vigorously fight for our liberties, we shall go clear through to the end of the road and become another Russia, or worse. … We have largely lost the conflict so far waged. But there is time to win the final victory, if we can sense our danger, and fight. 202. //%Author%Gene Adrian Gregory, April 9, 1962, in BYU Speeches of the Year, 1962, p. 5; italics added //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%What are the tactics? What is the strategy which is used by the Communists in this situation? They learned that it would not be possible for them to take Vietnam by default, by elections, or by political action. They were outstripped by the government in South Vietnam in the economic field. If they were to win, it was necessary to resort to force. Consequently, they pulled out Trotsky’s book on terrorism and Communism and the various works of Lenin and Mao Tee-Tung on this subject and they were trained carefully. This is the system which they were to apply during the succeeding years in South Vietnam and are applying ruthlessly now. 203. //%Author%Gordon B. Hinckley, President of the Church, in Conference Report, October 2001, pp. 87–88; italics added //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%For the first time since we became a nation, the United States has been seriously attacked on its mainland soil. … It was well planned, boldly executed, and the results were disastrous. It is estimated that more than 5,000 innocent people died. … It was cruel and cunning, an act of consummate evil. … It is the terrorist organizations that must be ferreted out and brought down. We of this Church know something of such groups. The Book of Mormon speaks of the Gadianton robbers, a vicious, oath-bound, and secret organization bent on evil and destruction. In their day they did all in their power, by whatever means available, to bring down the Church, to woo the people with sophistry, and to take control of the society. We see the same thing in the present situation. 205. //%Author%Boyd K. Packer, Acting President of the Quorum of the Twelve, in Conference Report, April 2004, pp. 78–81 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%We must not ignore Moroni’s words when he saw our day and said, “Ye [must] awake to a sense of your awful situation” (Ether 8:24). We cannot take lightly this warning from the Book of Mormon: “The Lord in his great infinite goodness doth bless and prosper those who put their trust in him … , doing all things for the welfare and happiness of his people; yea, then is the time that they do harden their hearts, and do forget the Lord their God, and do trample under their feet the Holy One—yea, and this because of their ease, and their exceedingly great prosperity. “And thus we see that except the Lord doth chasten his people with many afflictions, yea, except he doth visit them with death and with terror, and with famine and with all manner of pestilence, they will not remember him” (Helaman 12:1-3; italics added). Did you notice that word terror in that prophetic Book of Mormon warning? … We are not blind to the conditions in the world. The Apostle Paul prophesied of “perilous times” in the last days (2 Timothy 3:1), and he warned, “We wrestle not against flesh and blood, but against principalities, against powers, against the rulers of the darkness of this world, against spiritual wickedness in high places” (Ephesians 6:12). 206. //%Author%Ezra Taft Benson, in Conference Report, October 1961, p. 70–75; italics added //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%The fight against godless communism is a very real part of every man’s duty who holds the priesthood. It is the fight against slavery, immorality, atheism, terrorism, cruelty, barbarism, deceit, and the destruction of human life through a kind of tyranny unsurpassed by anything in human history. 207. //%Author%First Presidency Statement, in Conference Report, April 1942, p. 90; italics added //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%We again warn our people in America of the constantly increasing threat against our inspired Constitution and our free institutions set up under it. The same political tenets and philosophies that have brought war and terror in other parts of the world are at work amongst us in America. The proponents thereof are seeking to undermine our own form of government and to set up instead one of the forms of dictatorship now flourishing in other lands. 208. //%Author%David O. McKay, in The Instructor, February 1856, p. 34 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Next to being one in worshipping God, there is nothing in this world upon which this Church should be more united than in upholding and defending the Constitution of the United States! May the appeal of our Lord in His intercessory prayer for unity be realized in our homes, our wards, our stakes, and in our support of the basic principles of our Republic. 213. //%Author%Charles W. Nibley, in Conference Report, April 1922, p. 162 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%We need not fear as to this Nation from without. The Lord has said, “I will fortify this land against all other nations.” The danger is not from without, but from within, as the Book of Mormon plainly points out from secret combinations of men giving their first allegiance to their secret combination. That is the danger for after awhile these combinations will be contending one against the other until anarchy is apt to prevail, crime becomes rampant and danger to the existence of our government with its glorious Constitution is great, unless the people turn unto the Lord and seek Him. 228. //%Author%Bruce R. McConkie of the Quorum of the Twelve, 31 March 1979, at Welfare Session of General Conference, in “Stand Independent above All Other Creatures,” Ensign, May 1979, p. 93 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Nothing except the power of faith and the authority of the priesthood can save individuals and congregations from the atomic holocausts that surely shall be. And so we raise the warning voice and say: Take heed; prepare; watch and be ready. 229. //%Author%Harold B. Lee of the Quorum of the Twelve, in Improvement Era, Sept. 1961, p. 4 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%We heard him (President Clark) reply in answer to a question as to why he had put his life savings into his presently owned Grantsville ranch. He said, “This is all I have to leave to my family when I die, and if they are not too lazy to work it, they won’t starve. I have told them that when the first atomic bomb is dropped in America, that they are to go out there on the ranch and stay until it is over.” This last seemed not only to be wise counsel, but also a prophecy. 232. //%Author%George Q. Cannon, 7 July 1878, in Journal of Discourses, vol. 20 (London, 1880), p. 35 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%At the present time, in the western States especially, men are greatly concerned about the element known as Communism, which has taken possession of the minds of a numerous class of the people. The working classes are becoming very dissatisfied, and men are trembling for fear of what will come upon the nation. One of the strongest arguments that was made in favor of keeping up the United States army up to its present numbers was, that there would probably be riots in large cities and in populous centers, which would require the presence of the military acting as police to quell. And had it not been for this evil the army would have been cut down. But a good many men were anxious to have it increased, deeming it necessary for the preservation of life and property. When we reflect upon this it shows how changed have become the affairs of our nation, when it is deemed necessary to appeal to military power to maintain good order in the Republic. There can be no surer sign of the decay of a republic than when human life and property and liberty cannot be sustained by the masses of the people, and the military power, the ranks of which are filled with hired soldiers, has to be appealed to sustain good order in the midst of the people. Let such a state of things continue and there would soon be an end of true republicanism. 237. //%Author%Congressman Ron Paul of Texas, address to the U.S. House of Representatives, 10 July 2003 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Since the change of the political party in charge has not made a difference, who is really in charge? If the particular party in power makes little difference, whose policy is it that permits expanded government programs, increased spending, huge deficits, nation building and the pervasive invasion of our privacy, with fewer Fourth Amendment protections than ever before? Someone is responsible, and it is important that those of us who love liberty, and resent big-brother government, identify the philosophic supporters who have the most to say about the direction our country is going. … The so-called conservative revolution of the past two decades has given us massive growth in government size, spending and regulations. Deficits are exploding and the national debt is now rising at greater than a half-trillion dollars per year. … However, [now] the true believers in limited government are now shunned and laughed at. At the very least, they are ignored except when they are used by the new leaders of the right, the new conservatives now in charge of the US government. … Unfortunately, after 9-ll, the cause of liberty suffered a setback. As a result, millions of Americans voted for the less-than-perfect conservative revolution because they believed in the promises of the politicians. Now there is mounting evidence to indicate exactly what happened to the revolution. Government is bigger than ever, and future commitments are overwhelming. … Total U.S. government obligations are $43 trillion, while total net worth of U.S. households is just over $440 trillion. The country is broke, but no one in Washington seems to notice or care. The philosophic and political commitment for both guns and butter and especially for expanding the American empire must be challenged. This is crucial for our survival. … There is abundant evidence exposing those who drive our foreign policy justifying preemptive war. Those who scheme are proud of the achievements in usurping control over foreign policy. These are the neoconservatives of recent fame. Granted, they are talented and achieved a political victory that all policymakers must admire. But can freedom and the republic survive this takeover? … Since 9-11, protection of privacy, whether medical, personal or financial, has vanished. Free speech and the Fourth Amendment have been under constant attack. Higher welfare expenditures are endorsed by the leadership of both parties. Policing the world and nation-building issues are popular campaign targets, yet they are now standard operating procedures. There’s no sign that these programs will be slowed or reversed until either we are stopped by force overseas (which won’t be soon) or we go broke and can no longer afford these grandiose plans for a world empire (which will probably come sooner than later.) … The neoconservatives—a name they gave themselves—diligently worked their way into positions of power and influence. They documented their goals, strategy and moral justification for all they hoped to accomplish. Above all else, they were not and are not conservatives dedicated to limited, constitutional government. … All are key players in designing our new strategy of preemptive war. … Here is a brief summary of the general understanding of what neocons believe: 1.—They agree with Trotsky on permanent revolution, violent as well as intellectual. 2.—They are for redrawing the map of the Middle East and are willing to use force to do so. 3.—They believe in preemptive war to achieve desired ends. 4.—They accept the notion that the ends justify the means—that hardball politics is a moral necessity. 5.—They express no opposition to the welfare state. 6.—They are not bashful about an American empire; instead they strongly endorse it. 7.—They believe lying is necessary for the state to survive. 8.—They believe a powerful federal government is a benefit. 9.—They believe pertinent facts about how a society should be run should be held by the elite and withheld from those who do not have the courage to deal with it. 10.—They believe neutrality in foreign affairs is ill advised. 11.—They hold Leo Strauss in high esteem. 12.—They believe imperialism, if progressive in nature, is appropriate. 13.—Using American might to force American ideals on others is acceptable. Force should not be limited to the defense of our country. 14.—9-11 resulted from the lack of foreign entanglements, not from too many. 15.—They dislike and despise libertarians (therefore, the same applies to all strict constitutionalists.) 16.—They endorse attacks on civil liberties, such as those found in the Patriot Act, as being necessary. 17.—They unconditionally support Israel and have a close alliance with the Likud Party. Various organizations and publications over the last 30 years have played a significant role in the rise to power of the neoconservatives. It took plenty of money and commitment to produce the intellectual arguments needed to convince the many participants in the movement of its respectability. … Their views only gained momentum in the 1990s following the first Persian Gulf War—which still has not ended even with removal of Saddam Hussein. They became convinced that a much more militant approach to resolving all the conflicts in the Middle East was an absolute necessity, and they were determined to implement that policy. … The Defense Policy Board, chaired by Richard Perle, played no small role in coordinating the various projects and think tanks, all determined to take us into war against Iraq. It wasn’t too long before the dream of empire was brought closer to reality by the election of 2000 with Paul Wolfowitz, Richard Cheney, and Donald Rumsfeld playing key roles in this accomplishment. The plan to promote an “American greatness” imperialistic foreign policy was now a distinct possibility. Iraq offered a great opportunity to prove their long-held theories. This opportunity was a consequence of the 9-11 disaster. … This [neocon] attitude is a far cry from the advice of the Founders, who advocated no entangling alliances and neutrality as the proper goal of American foreign policy. … Who knows where we’ll go next—Iran, Syria or North Korea? … Power, politics and privilege prevail over the rule of law, liberty, justice and peace. But it does not need to be that way. Neoconism has brought together many old ideas about how government should rule the people. It may have modernized its appeal and packaging, but authoritarian rule is authoritarian rule, regardless of the humanitarian overtones. … Michael Ledeen and other neoconservatives are already lobbying for war against Iran. Ledeen is pretty nasty to those who call for a calmer, reasoned approach by calling those who are not ready for war “cowards and appeasers of tyrants.” Because some urge a less militaristic approach to dealing with Iran, he claims they are betraying America’s best “traditions.” 268. //%Author%Ezra Taft Benson, in Conference Report, April 1969, p. 14; emphasis added //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%When General William F. Dean was released from a Korean Communist prison camp, the young Chinese psychologists who had been trying to break him said: “General, don’t feel bad about leaving us. You know, we will soon be with you. We are going to capture your country.” Asked how, they replied: “We are going to destroy the moral character of a generation of our young Americans, and when we cave finished you will have nothing with which to really defend yourselves against us.” And so the precepts of men are at work on our youth in so many ways. Said President Clark, “… a tremendous amount of the modern art, of the modern literature and music, and the drama that we have today is utterly demoralizing—utterly.” (Relief Society Magazine, December 1952, p. 792.) Have you been listening to the music that many young folks are hearing today? Some of it is nerve-jamming in nature and much of it has been deliberately designed to promote revolution, dope, immorality, and a gap between parent and child. And some of this music has invaded our church cultural halls. 273. //%Author%Boyd K. Packer, Acting President of the Quorum of the Twelve, in a speech entitled ““Watchman, What of the Night,” given at the Utah Peace Officers Association Fallen Officer Memorial, 6 May 2004 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%I speak now of another kind of darkness that settles about us, a darkness not caused by the rotation of the earth but one that is invisible to the eye. Evidences of it can be found in every newspaper, every day. It is the darkness that comes into the minds of men and fosters complicity, wickedness, and crime—sometimes unspeakable and brutal. … I close with an alert—a warning. That invisible kind of darkness settles ever more heavily. The word terror, not used much in the past, is now an unwelcome presence. 278. //%Author%Thomas S. Monson, “The Women’s Movement: Liberation or Deception?” Ensign, Jan. 1971, pp. 17–20 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Recently I read with interest feature articles that appeared in five widely circulated American publications. All presented information regarding the subject of women’s liberation. Several of the articles called attention to the fact that 1970 marked the fiftieth anniversary of the right of women to vote in the United States. And from this base came a description of the goals and demands that are now being made by some women: free abortion, free child care, and equal employment. One piece suggested that women should literally demand these things. This article then went on to describe much of Friedrich Engels’ philosophy. Engels, you will recall, was a colleague of Karl Marx and spoke out with irony and force against much of family life. He referred to marriage as a dreary mutation of slavery, urged its abolition, and suggested a public responsibility for the upbringing of children. In another magazine there was a report dealing with “The Motherhood Myth.” This article debunked the idea that there is anything particularly fulfilling and satisfying about being a mother. It quoted one psychiatrist who suggested that people should move from planned parenthood to planned unparenthood and that it would be more loving to children not to have them. The author of the article, a senior editor of the magazine, concluded: “If God were still speaking to us in a voice we could hear, even He would probably say, ‘Be fruitful. Don’t multiply.’.” Such idiotic and blatantly false philosophy must not be entertained or believed. For God has spoken. Indeed, he has spoken in a voice clearly understood by those who have ears to hear and hearts that know and feel. … Error, sin, lust, envy, and evil thrive in the midst of today’s prosperity. More than $5 million a year is spent on pornographic literature by which vile men try to “dig gold out of dirt.” Magazines, movies, television programs, and other mass media are utilized to lower moral standards and behavior. Crime and delinquency are rampant, and spiritual values are questioned. Our interests are centered in ourselves. We are preoccupied with material things. Many of us are more concerned about conquering space than about conquering ourselves. We are more dedicated to material security than to inner purity. We give much more thought to what we wear, what we eat, what we drink, and what we can do to relax than we give to what we are. … What the modernists, even the liberationists, fail to remember is that women, in addition to being persons, also belong to a sex, and that with the differences in sex are associated important differences in function and behavior. Equality of rights does not imply identity of functions. 280. //%Author%Gordon B. Hinckley, 4 Aug. 1996, in Church News //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%There has been going on in this nation for a good while a process which I call, “secularizing America.” It is of this that I wish to say a few words this evening because I feel so strongly about it and because I feel we are paying a terrible price because of it. … We live under a Constitution that after more than two centuries stands as the greatest bulwark of human freedom to be found anywhere on earth. … This Constitution is the keystone of our national life. … My great concern, my great interest, is that we preserve for the generations to come those wondrous elements of our society and manner of living that will bequeath to them the strengths and goodness of which we have been the beneficiaries. But I worry as I see some of the signs of sickness of which I have spoken. I believe that a significant factor in the decay we observe about us comes of a forsaking of the God whom our fathers knew, loved, worshiped, and looked to for strength. There is a plainly discernable secularization that is occurring. Its consequences are a deterioration of family life, a weakening of self-discipline, a scoffing at the thought of accountability unto the Almighty, and an unbecoming arrogance for any people who have been so richly blessed through the goodness of a generous Providence as we have been. 281. //%Author%Neal A. Maxwell, “Eternalism vs. Secularism,” Ensign, Oct. 1974 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Secularism tends to want to deal increasingly with systems, governments, labels, groups, etc.—with adjustments in the things outside man, apparently hoping that, somehow, changing the external scenery will change the things inside man. … We are rightfully worried about the swelling bureaucracies of government, which need to respond to us—not to regiment us. But we cannot tame those bureaucracies unless we first tame our appetites, for a bloated bureaucracy is merely a manifestation of citizen appetites, demands, and the subsequent need for external controls. … If we are not able to build into ourselves and our families the brakes of self-restraint and self-discipline, we are apt, unwittingly, to create tyranny in our government or anarchy in our citizenry. If we push onto the government the management not only of our economy, but also the management of our morals, the civil servants of the future will be neither civil nor servants. 282. //%Author%James E. Faust, “A New Civil Religion,” Ensign, Oct. 1992, p. 69–71 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%There seems to be developing a new civil religion. The civil religion I refer to is a secular religion. It has no moral absolutes. It is nondenominational. It is nontheistic. It is politically focused. It is antagonistic to religion. It rejects the historic religious traditions of America. It feels strange. If this trend continues, nonbelief will be more honored than belief. While all beliefs must be protected, are atheism, agnosticism, cynicism, and moral relativism to be more safeguarded and valued than Christianity, Judaism, and the tenets of Islam, which hold that there is a Supreme Being and that mortals are accountable to him? If so, this would, in my opinion, place America in great moral jeopardy. … The new civil religion I speak of finds its source of rights by invoking the power of the state. It seems to have little purpose, few common values for morality except self-interest. … The new civil religion is, in my opinion, coming dangerously close to become a de facto state religion of secularism. … So now we find ourselves in a situation where, unlike the Pilgrims, the Mormon pioneers, and others, there is nowhere to go to escape a new civil de facto secular state religion that continually limits public religious expression and fosters instead the secular values and expressions. How do we preserve the essence of our humanity? … We can exercise our right, with all other citizens, to vote for men and women who reflect our own values. We can also express our views as all other citizens have a right to do in the legislative process of both the state and the nation. With all others, we can claim our rights of free expression. We can petition for the redress of grievances. We must hold to our beliefs and do what we can, for there is no desert to flee to in order to have full freedom. There is no place across the waters for the Pilgrims. 283. //%Author%Steve Bonta, “Creating the New World Religion,” The New American, 3 July 2000, pp. 40–41 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%In the new world order we may anticipate not only world government under the UN, but also, clearly, a State-sponsored new world religion militantly intolerant of religious “fundamentalism.” The globocrats have no intention of allowing freedom of religion under a new world order, and are working tirelessly to create conditions in which religious persecution under a UN-administered world government will be feasible. According to Hans Küng, a theologian influential in globalist circles, “Any form of … church conservatism is to be rejected.... To put it bluntly: no regressive or repressive religion—whether Christian, Islamic, Jewish or of whatever provenance—has a long-term future.” Gerald Barney, director of the Millennium Institute, reported that a prominent internationalist once told him: “Religion must die. It is the fundamental cause of virtually all social, economic, and ecological problems and much of the violence in world.” As we surrender more and more of our political and economic sovereignty and freedom to the United Nations and kindred internationalist organizations, we will increasingly see our religion, morals, and way of life under attack by this same gang of megalomaniacal internationalists. Like the radicals and utopian revolutionaries of every age, they will not be content with mere control of our commerce, our militaries, and our civil laws; they will insist on attacking and destroying our families, our churches, and our culture as well, inasmuch as these institutions pose a threat to their long-term design of world domination. For our Judeo-Christian belief systems they will substitute paganism; for love of God and our fellow men they will offer up worship of the ecosystem; and instead of traditional families, marriage, and moral restraint they will promulgate abortion, promiscuity, and sexual deviance. In a preview of coming attractions, all of these are already being pushed in varying degrees by various amoral international agencies. In the still-robust remnants of our Judeo-Christian, Western Culture, we have the resources to repudiate the UN’s assault on our nation, our religion, and, indeed, on our liberty. We must recognize the UN as a powerful adversary in the so-called “culture war,” and for that, among many other reasons, work diligently to Get US out! 284. //%Author%First Presidency Statement, 9 Mar. 1979, in “News of the Church,” Ensign, May 1979, p. 108 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%We, thus, deplore the growing efforts to establish irreligion, such as atheism or secularism, as the official position of the United States of America, thus obscuring and eroding the rich and diverse religious heritage of our nation. 285. //%Author%John Taylor, Salt Lake Tribune, 6 Jan. 1880 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%We believe in honesty, morality and purity, in freedom and loyalty to our country; but when they enact tyrannical laws, forbidding us the free exercise of our religion, we cannot submit. God is greater than the United States. And when the Government conflicts with Heaven, we will be ranged under the banner of Heaven and against the Government. … We do not want to rebel against the United States. Rebellion is not on the program, but we will worship God according to the dictates of our own conscience. We want to be friendly with the United States, if the Government will let us; but not one jot nor title of our rights will we give up to purchase it. … I defy the United States. I will obey God. These are my sentiments, and all of you who sympathize with me in this position raise your hands. (All hands went up sustaining his position.) 294. //%Author%Ezra Taft Benson, “The Greatest Work in the World,” Improvement Era, vol. 70 (January 1967), p. 26; Also in The Teachings of Ezra Taft Benson (Salt Lake City: Bookcraft, 1988) pp. 320–321 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%From the fifth grade through the fourth year of college, our young people are being indoctrinated with a Marxist philosophy, and I am fearful of the harvest. The younger generation is further to the left than most adults realize. The old concepts of our Founding Fathers are scoffed and jeered at by young moderns whose goals appear to be the destruction of integrity and virtue, and the glorification of pleasure, thrills, and self-indulgence. 295. //%Author%Ezra Taft Benson, in Conference Report, October 1970, p. 22 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%As a watchman on the tower, I feel to warn you that one of the chief means of misleading our youth and destroying the family unit is our educational institutions. President Joseph F. Smith referred to false educational ideas as one of the three threatening dangers among our Church members. … The tenth plank in Karl Marx’s Manifesto for destroying our kind of civilization advocated the establishment of “free education for all children in public schools.” There were several reasons why Marx wanted government to run the schools. Dr. A. A. Hodge pointed out one of them when he said, “It is capable of exact demonstration that if every party in the State has the right of excluding from public schools whatever he does not believe to be true, then he that believes most must give way to him that believes least, and then he that believes least must give way to him that believes absolutely nothing, no matter in how small a minority the atheists or agnostics may be. It is self-evident that on this scheme, if it is consistently and persistently carried out in all parts of the country, the United States system of national popular education will be the most efficient and widespread instrument for the propagation of atheism which the world has ever seen.” After the tragic prayer decision was made by the Court, President David O. McKay stated, “The Supreme Court of the United States severs the connecting cord between the public schools of the United States and the source of divine intelligence, the Creator, himself.” (Relief Society Magazine, December 1962, p. 878.) 296. //%Author%Boyd K. Packer, 9 Oct. 1996, in Charge to the David O. McKay School of Education at BYU //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%In many places it is literally not safe physically for youngsters to go to school. And in many schools—and it’s becoming almost generally true—it is spiritually unsafe to attend public schools. Look back over the history of education to the turn of the century and the beginning of the educational philosophies, pragmatism and humanism were the early ones, and they branched out into a number of other philosophies which have led us now into a circumstance where our schools are producing the problems that we face. 299. //%Author%Ezra Taft Benson, in Conference Report, October 1961 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%We should accept the command of the Lord and treat socialistic communism as a tool of Satan. We should follow the counsel of the President of the Church and resist the influence and policies of the socialistic-communist conspiracy wherever they are found—in the schools, in the churches, in governments, in unions, in business, in agriculture. 300. //%Author%J. Reuben Clark, Jr., quoted in “Church Welfare Services’ Basic Principles,” Ensign, May 1976, p. 121 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%You must remember that back and behind this whole propaganda of “pensions,” gratuities, and doles to which we are now being subjected, is the idea of setting up in America, a socialistic or communistic state, in which the family would disappear, religion would be prescribed and controlled by the state, and we should all become mere creatures of the state, ruled over by ambitious and designing men. 301. //%Author%Ezra Taft Benson, President of the Church, A Witness and a Warning (Salt Lake City: Deseret Book Co., 1988), p. 6; See also “News of the Church,” Ensign, Sept. 1987, p. 78; “First Presidency Message: The Book of Mormon Is the Word of God,” Ensign, Jan. 1988, p. 5; Ensign, May 1975, p. 65 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Our families may be corrupted by worldly trends and teachings unless we know how to use the [Book of Mormon] to expose and combat the falsehoods in socialism, organic evolution, rationalism, humanism, and so forth. 302. //%Author%Ezra Taft Benson, “Jesus Christ—Gifts and Expectations,” New Era, May 1975, p. 19 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%If we really did our homework and approached the Book of Mormon doctrinally, we could expose the errors and find the truths to combat many of the current false theories and philosophies of men, including socialism, humanism, organic evolution, and others. I have noted within the Church the difference in discernment, in insight, conviction, and spirit between those who know and love the Book of Mormon and those who do not. That book is a great sifter. 304. //%Author%Brigham Young, President of the Church, 6 May 1870, in Journal of Discourses, vol. 14, pp. 21–22 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%We heard Brother Taylor’s exposition of what is called Socialism this morning. What can they do? Live on each other and beg. It is a poor, unwise and very imbecile people who cannot take care of themselves. 306. //%Author%David O. McKay, in Deseret News, “Church Section,” 18 October 1952, p. 2 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%During the first half of the twentieth century we have traveled far into the soul-destroying land of socialism and made strange alliances through which we have become involved in almost continuous hot and cold wars over the whole of the earth. In this retreat from freedom the voices of protesting citizens have been drowned by raucous riots of intolerance and abuse from those who led the retreat and their millions of gullible youth, who are marching merrily to their doom, carrying banners on which are emblazoned such intriguing and misapplied labels as social justice, equality, reform. patriotism, social welfare. 307. //%Author%Ezra Taft Benson, 24 May 1961, BYU Speeches of the Year, 1961, pp. 10—11 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%We do not want a Communist system in the United States, and Communism usually follows Socialism. We do not want anything to do with this criminal conspiracy which is Communism. … I hope that there will not be any students on this campus who will become dupes and tools of Communist agitators, because they are working on practically every campus in America today, including some in our own good state of Utah. I hope you become familiar with this evil system and have nothing to do with it. … The threat of Communism is very real. The threat of Socialism is even more real. Communism is more than an economic system, it is a total philosophy of life, atheistic and utterly opposed to all we hold dear as a great, free Christian nation. No true Latter-day Saint can be a Communist or a Socialist because Communist principles run counter to the revealed word of God and to the Constitution of this land which was established by men whom the God of Heaven raised up unto that very purpose. 308. //%Author%Ezra Taft Benson, in Conference Report, October 1961, p. 70–75 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%The Lord revealed to the Prophet Nephi that he established the gentiles on this land to be a free people forever, that if they were a righteous nation and overcame the wickedness and secret abominations which would arise in their midst, they would inherit the land forever. (1 Nephi 14:1-2.) … But on the other hand, if the gentiles on this land reject the word of God and conspire to overthrow liberty and the Constitution, then their doom is fixed, and they “… shall be cut off from among my people who are of the covenant.” (1 Nephi 14:6; 3 Nephi 21:11, 14, 21; D&C 84:114-115, 117.) The great destructive force which was to be turned loose on the earth and which the prophets for centuries have been calling the “abomination of desolation” is vividly described by those who saw it in vision. Ours is the first generation to realize how literally these prophecies can be fulfilled now that God, through science, has unlocked the secret to thermonuclear reaction. In the light of these prophecies there should be no doubt in the mind of any priesthood holder that the human family is headed for trouble. There are rugged days ahead. It is time for every man who wishes to do his duty to get himself prepared—physically, spiritually, and psychologically—for the task which may come at any time, as suddenly as the whirlwind. Where do we stand today? All over the world the light of freedom is being diminished. Across whole continents of the earth freedom is being totally obliterated. Never in recorded history has any movement spread its power so far and so fast as has socialistic-communism in the last three decades. The facts are not pleasant to review. Communist leaders are jubilant with their success. They are driving freedom back on almost every front. It is time, therefore, that every American, and especially every member of the priesthood, became informed about the aims, tactics, and schemes of socialistic-communism. This becomes particularly important when it is realized that communism is turning out to be the earthly image of the plan which Satan presented in the pre-existence. The whole program of socialistic-communism is essentially a war against God and the plan of salvation—the very plan which we fought to uphold during “the war in heaven.” Up to now some members of the Church have stood aloof, feeling that the fight against socialistic-communism is “controversial” and unrelated to the mission of the Church or the work of the Lord. But the President of the Church in our day has made it clear that the fight against atheistic communism is a major challenge to the Church and every member in it. During the general conference of the Church in October 1959, President David O. McKay, in discussing the threat of communism, referred to W. Cleon Skousen’s book, The Naked Communist, and said, “I admonish everybody to read that excellent book.” He then quoted the following from the flyleaf: “The conflict between communism and freedom is the problem of our time. It overshadows all other problems.” The fight against godless communism is a very real part of every man’s duty who holds the priesthood. It is the fight against slavery, immorality, atheism, terrorism, cruelty, barbarism, deceit, and the destruction of human life through a kind of tyranny unsurpassed by anything in human history. Here is a struggle against the evil, satanical priestcraft of Lucifer. Truly it can be called, “a continuation of the war in heaven.” In the war in heaven the devil advocated absolute eternal security at the sacrifice of our freedom. Although there is nothing more desirable to a Latter-day Saint than eternal security in God’s presence, and although God knew, as did we, that some of us would not achieve this security if we were allowed our freedom—yet the very God of heaven, who has more mercy than us all, still decreed no guaranteed security except by a man’s own freedom of choice and individual initiative. Today the devil as a wolf in a supposedly new suit of sheep’s clothing is enticing some men, both in and out of the Church, to parrot his line by advocating planned government guaranteed security programs at the expense of our liberties. Latter-day Saints should be reminded how and why they voted as they did in heaven. If some have decided to change their vote they should repent—throw their support on the side of freedom—and cease promoting this subversion. When all of the trappings of propaganda and pretense have been pulled aside, the exposed hard-core structure of modern communism is amazingly similar to the ancient Book of Mormon record of secret societies such as the Gadiantons. In the ancient American civilization there was no word which struck greater terror to the hearts of the people than the name of the Gadiantons. It was a secret political party which operated as a murder cult. Its object was to infiltrate legitimate government, plant its officers in high places, and then seize power and live off the spoils appropriated from the people. (It would start out as a small group of “dissenters” and by using secret oaths with the threat of death for defectors it would gradually gain a choke hold on the political and economic life of whole civilizations.) The object of the Gadiantons, like modern communists, was to destroy the existing government and set up a ruthless criminal dictatorship over the whole land. … Some timid, vacillating political leaders proclaim that communism is something we will have to learn to live with … whether it is Khrushchev, or some other leader. The present communist system, they declare, will continue because there is no alternate system to replace communism. The policy of increasing power, of pushing their system outward and using the communist party, they say, will go on. Such a negative attitude writes off the hundreds of millions behind the iron curtain as a lost cause. Surely no courageous, liberty-loving citizen will treat the communist secret combination as “something we will have to learn to live with.” … We must ever keep in mind that collectivized socialism is part of the communist strategy. Communism is fundamentally socialism. We will never win our fight against communism by making concessions to socialism. Communism and socialism, closely related, must be defeated on principle. The close relationship between socialism and communism is clearly pointed out by Senator Strom Thurmond of South Carolina in a letter to the editor of the Washington Post, of August 6, 1961, in these words: “The industrial achievements of the U. S. are the result of an economic system which is the antithesis of socialism. Our economic system is called ‘capitalism’ or ‘private enterprise’ and is based on private property rights, the profit motive and competition. “Both communism and socialism seek to destroy our economic system and replace it with socialism; and their success, whether through evolution by socialism or through revolution by communism or a combination, will destroy not only our economic system, but our liberty, including the ‘civil’ aspects as well. … “… The ‘common ground’ of socialism and communism is a factor to which the American people should be alerted. Without a clear understanding that communism is socialism, the total threat and menace of the cold war can never be comprehended and fought to victory.” When socialism is understood, we will realize that many of the programs advocated, and some of those already adopted in the United States, fall clearly within the category of socialism. What is socialism? It is simply governmental ownership and management of the essential means for the production and distribution of goods. We must never forget that nations may sow the seeds of their own destruction while enjoying unprecedented prosperity. The socialistic-communist conspiracy to weaken the United States involves attacks on many fronts. To weaken the American free-enterprise economy which outproduced both its enemies and allies during World War II is a high priority target of the communist leaders. Their press and other propaganda media are therefore constantly selling the principles of centralized or federal control of farms, railroads, electric power, schools, steel, maritime shipping, and many other aspects of the economy—but always in the name of public welfare. This carries out the strategy laid down by the communist masters. John Strachey, a top official in the Labor Socialist party of Great Britain, in his book entitled The Theory and Practice of Socialism said: “It is impossible to establish communism as the immediate successor to capitalism. It is accordingly proposed to establish socialism as something which we can put in the place of our present decaying capitalism. Hence, communists work for the establishment of socialism as a necessary transition stage on the road to communism.” … It is significant that 118 years ago this month the Prophet Joseph Smith, after attending lectures on socialism, made this official entry in church history: “I said I did not believe the doctrine.” (History of the Church, Vol. 6, p. 33.) No true Latter-day Saint and no true American can be a socialist or a communist or support programs leading in that direction. These evil philosophies are incompatible with Mormonism, the true gospel of Jesus Christ. What can priesthood holders do? There are many things we can do to meet the challenge of the adversary in our day. First, we should become informed about communism, about socialism, and about Americanism. What better way can one become informed than by first studying the inspired words of the prophets and using that as a foundation; against which to test all other material. This is in keeping with the Prophet Joseph Smith’s motto, “When the Lord commands, do it.” (Ibid., Vol. 2, p. 170.) The Foundation for Economic Education, Irvington-on-Hudson, New York on which President J. Reuben Clark, Jr., served as a board member, continues to supply sound freedom literature. We should know enough about American free enterprise to be able to defend it. We should know what makes it possible for six percent of humanity—living under our free economy—to produce about one-half of the earth’s developed wealth each year. We should know why paternalism, collectivism, or unnecessary federal supervision will hold our standard of living down and reduce productivity just as it has in every country where it has been tried. We should also know why the communist leaders consider socialism the highroad to communism. Second, we should accept the command of the Lord and treat socialistic communism as the tool of Satan. We should follow the counsel of the President of the Church and resist the influence and policies of the socialist-communist conspiracy wherever they are found—in the schools, in the churches, in governments, in unions, in businesses, in agriculture. Third, we should help those who have been deceived or who are misinformed to find the truth. Unless each person who knows the truth will “stand up and speak up” it is difficult for the deceived or confused citizen to find his way back. Fourth, we should not make the mistake of calling people “communist” just because they happen to be helping the communist cause. Thousands of patriotic Americans, including a few Latter-day Saints, have helped the communists without realizing it. Others have knowingly helped without joining the party. The remedy is to avoid name-calling, but point out clearly and persuasively how they are helping the communists. Fifth, each priesthood holder should use his influence in the community to resist the erosion process which is taking place in our political and economic life. He should use the political party of his choice to express his evaluation of important issues. He should see that his party is working to preserve freedom, not destroy it. He should join responsible local groups interested in promoting freedom and free competitive enterprise, in studying political issues, appraising the voting records and proposed programs, and writing to members of Congress, promoting good men in public office and scrutinizing local, state, and federal agencies to see that the will of the people is being carried out. He should not wait for the Lord’s servants to give instruction for every detail once they have announced the direction in which the priesthood should go. Each member should exercise prayerful judgment and then act. … May God give us the wisdom to recognize the threat to our freedom and the strength to meet this danger courageously. Yes, perilous times are ahead, but if we do our duty in all things, God will give us inner peace and overrule all things for our good. 309. //%Author%J. Reuben Clark, Jr., in Deseret News, “Church Section,” 16 June 1945, p. 4 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Today government has touched our lives so intimately in all their relationships and all these governmental touchings have been so tabbed as political, that we cannot discuss anything relating to our material welfare and existence without laying ourselves liable to the charge that we are talking politics. 310. //%Author%Ezra Taft Benson, in Conference Report, April 1968, p. 50 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%If American freedom is lost, if America is destroyed, if our blood-bought freedom is surrendered, it will be because of Americans. What’s more, it will probably not be only the work of subversive and criminal Americans. The Benedict Arnolds will not be the only ones to forfeit our freedom. “At what point, then, is the approach of danger to be expected?” asked Abraham Lincoln, and he answered, “If it ever reaches us, it must spring up among us. It cannot come from abroad. If destruction be our lot, we must ourselves be its author and finisher; as a nation of freemen, we must live through all time or die by suicide.” (Springfield, Illinois, January 27, 1837.) If America is destroyed, it may be by Americans who salute the flag, sing the national anthem, march in patriotic parades, cheer Fourth of July speakers—normally good Americans, but Americans who fail to comprehend what is required to keep our country strong and free—Americans who have been lulled away into a false security. … “Unless those in authority in the United States can be influenced to abandon the suicidal course on which they have embarked—or unless they can be replaced by men who will—we cannot hope to restore in our nation the kind of domestic peace and order which has made our many generations proud to be Americans … living in a land of freedom, security, opportunity, and justice under law. “The crisis we now face is the most serious, the most dangerous, in the history of our country. Each of us must diligently employ our influence and our effort—in speech, letters, and at the ballot box—to help set straight the way.” The facts are clear. Our problem centers in Washington, D.C. And this applies to the administration of both political parties. In the words of James Madison, “Since the general civilization of mankind, I believe there are more instances of the abridgment of freedom of the people by gradual and silent encroachments of those in power, than by violent and sudden usurpations.” (Elliot’s Debates, Vol. 3, p. 87.) 311. //%Author%Ezra Taft Benson, in Conference Report, October 1961 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Our priceless heritage is threatened today as never before in our lifetime: from without by the forces of Godless Communism, and at home by our complacency and by the insidious forces of the Socialist-Communist conspiracy, with the help of those who would abandon the ancient landmarks set by our fathers and take us down the road to destruction. 312. //%Author%Ezra Taft Benson, in Conference Report, October 1960, p. 101–106 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%We live today in an age of peril. It is an age in which we are threatened with the loss not only of wealth and material prosperity, but also of something far more precious—our freedom itself. The very thing that distinguishes man from the beasts—man s freedom to act: freedom to choose—is threatened as never before by a total and atheistic philosophy of life known as communism. In April, I called your attention briefly to the nature of communism. Let us remember these basic facts. Those who subscribe to this philosophy stop at nothing to achieve their ends. They do not hesitate to destroy—if they are strong enough—whatever stands in their way. Our own generation has witnessed the Russian communists liquidate millions of their fellow countrymen. Even more recently we have seen the Chinese communists wipe out millions of their fellow countrymen—no one knows the exact number. To the true communist, nothing is evil if it is expedient. Being without conscience or honor, he feels completely justified in using whatever means are necessary to achieve his goal: force, trickery, lies, broken promises, mayhem, and individual and mass murder. By these ruthless means communism has, in a little over forty years, brought more people under its domination than the total number of Christians now living in the entire world—and Christianity, as the world thinks of it, has been in existence for nearly two thousand years. … Let us have no illusions about them. Their leader has told us bluntly—their purpose is not alone to enslave us—they want to bury us. And while it is apparently true that Chairman Khrushchev is content for the time being at least to avoid war as a means of communist expansion, there is little doubt that the leaders of Red China view war as inevitable and await only the propitious moment in which to strike. What we face today is not just a cold war, not just a struggle for the control of land, sea, air, and even outer space, but total competition for the control of men’s minds. Unless we meet it and defeat it, we shall almost inevitably one day face the loss of all that we hold dear. In less than half a century, I repeat, this evil system has gained control over one-third of mankind, and it is steadily pursuing its vicious goal of control over all the rest of the world. It is time, and past time, for us to be alarmed. “Wo be unto him that is at ease. Wo be unto him that crieth ‘all is well.’.” (2 Nephi 28:24-25.) … The only political party now functioning in Cuba is the Popular Socialist Party, the Communist Party under another name. ¼ We must revivify Western ideals and in particular the ideals of our own great nation. We must call back the spirit of the dauntless leaders of the past. We must meet our present-day challenge not with softness and complacency, but with the depth, wisdom, and daring that characterized America in the days of old. … The communists bring to the nations they infiltrate a message and a philosophy that affects human life in its entirety. Communism seeks to provide, what in too many instances a lukewarm Christianity has not provided, a total interpretation of life. Communists are willing to be revolutionary; to take a stand for this and against that. They challenge what they do not believe in—customs, practices, ideas, traditions. They believe heatedly in their philosophy. But our civilization and our people are seemingly afraid to be revolutionary. We are too “broadminded” to challenge what we do not believe in. We are afraid of being thought intolerant, uncouth, ungentlemanly. We have become lukewarm in our beliefs. And for that we perhaps merit the bitter condemnation stated in Revelation 3:16: “So then because thou art lukewarm, and neither cold nor hot, I will spue thee out of my mouth.” … In this dark hour, the fate of the world seems to rest largely in our hands. We who live in this choice land, in fact all of the land of Zion, have the opportunity, the responsibility, and the solemn obligation to stand firm for freedom and justice and morality—the dignity and brotherhood of man as a child of God. 313. //%Author%David O. McKay, President of the Church, in Conference Report, April 1966, p. 109–110 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%In order that there may be no misunderstandings by bishops, stake presidents, and others regarding members of the Church participating in non-church meetings to study and become informed on the Constitution of the United States, Communism, etc., I wish to make the following statements that I have been sending out from my office for some time and that have come under question by some stake authorities, bishoprics, and others. Church members are at perfect liberty to act according to their own consciences in the matter of safeguarding our way of life. They are, of course, encouraged to honor the highest standards of the gospel and to work to preserve their own freedoms. They are free to participate in non-church meetings that are held to warn people of the threat of Communism or any other theory or principle that will deprive us of our free agency or individual liberties vouchsafed by the Constitution of the United States. The Church, out of respect for the rights of all its members to have their political views and loyalties, must maintain the strictest possible neutrality. We have no intention of trying to interfere with the fullest and freest exercise of the political franchise of our members under and within our Constitution, which the Lord declared he established “by the hands of wise men whom [he] raised up unto this very purpose” (D&C 101:80) and which, as to the principles thereof, the Prophet Joseph Smith, dedicating the Kirtland Temple, prayed should be “established forever.” (D&C 109:54.) The Church does not yield any of its devotion to or convictions about safeguarding the American principles and the establishments of government under federal and state constitutions and the civil rights of men safeguarded by these. The position of this Church on the subject of Communism has never changed. We consider it the greatest Satanical threat to peace, prosperity, and the spread of God’s work among men that exists on the face of the earth. In this connection, we are continually being asked to give our opinion concerning various patriotic groups or individuals who are fighting Communism and speaking up for freedom. Our immediate concern, however, is not with parties, groups, or persons, but with principles. We therefore commend and encourage every person and every group who is sincerely seeking to study Constitutional principles and awaken a sleeping and apathetic people to the alarming conditions that are rapidly advancing about us. We wish all of our citizens throughout the land were participating in some type of organized self-education in order that they could better appreciate what is happening and know what they can do about it. Supporting the FBI, the police, the congressional committees investigating Communism, and various organizations that are attempting to awaken the people through educational means is a policy we warmly endorse for all our people. The entire concept and philosophy of Communism is diametrically opposed to everything for which the Church stands—belief in Deity, belief in the dignity and eternal nature of man, and the application of the gospel to efforts for peace in the world. Communism is militantly atheistic and is committed to the destruction of faith wherever it may be found. The Russian Commissar of Education wrote: “We must hate Christians and Christianity. Even the best of them must be considered our worst enemies. Christian love is an obstacle to the development of the revolution. Down with love for one’s neighbor. What we want is hate. Only then shall we conquer the universe.” On the other hand, the gospel teaches the existence of God as our Eternal and Heavenly Father and declares: “… him only shalt thou serve.” (Matt. 4:10.) Communism debases the individual and makes him the enslaved tool of the state, to which he must look for sustenance and religion. Communism destroys man’s God-given free agency. No member of this Church can be true to his faith, nor can any American be loyal to his trust, while lending aid, encouragement or sympathy to any of these false philosophies, for if he does they will prove snares to his feet. 314. //%Author%First Presidency Statement, in Improvement Era, vol. 39 (August 1936), p. 488 //%end%%start%%cat=NWO//%quote%With great regret we learn from credible sources, governmental and others, that a few Church members are joining directly or indirectly, the Communists and are taking part in their activities. The Church does not interfere, and has no intention of trying to interfere, with the fullest and freest exercise of the political franchise of its members, under and within our Constitution which the Lord declared: “I established … by the hands of wise men whom I raised up unto this very purpose,” and which, as to the principles thereof, the Prophet, dedicating the Kirtland Temple, prayed should be “established forever.” But Communism is not a political party nor a political plan under the Constitution; it is a system of government that is the opposite of our Constitutional government, and it would be necessary to destroy our government before Communism could be set up in the United States. Since Communism, established, would destroy our American Constitutional government, to support Communism is treasonable to our free institutions, and no patriotic American citizen may become either a Communist or supporter of Communism. … Furthermore, it is charged by universal report, which is not successfully contradicted or disproved, that Communism undertakes to control, if not indeed to proscribe the religious life of the people living within its jurisdiction, and that it even reaches its hand into the sanctity of the family circle itself, disrupting the normal relationship of parent and child, all in a manner unknown and unsanctioned under the Constitutional guarantees under which we in America live. Such interference would be contrary to the fundamental precepts of the Gospel and to the teachings and order of the Church. Communism being thus hostile to loyal American citizenship and incompatible with true Church membership, of necessity no loyal American citizen and no faithful Church member can be a Communist. We call upon all Church members completely to eschew Communism. The safety of our divinely inspired Constitutional government and the welfare of our Church imperatively demand that Communism shall have no place in America. ---------------------------------------------------- %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Mr. Chairman, we have in this Country one of the most corrupt institutions the world has ever known. I refer to the Federal Reserve Board and the Federal Reserve Banks, herinafter called the Fed. … This evil institution has impoverished and ruined the people of these United States, has bankrupted itself, and has practically bankrupted our Government. It has done this through the defects of the law under which it operates, through the maladministration of that law by the Fed and through the corrupt practices of the moneyed vultures who control it. Some people think that the Federal Reserve Banks are United States Government institutions. They are private monopolies which prey upon the people of these United States for the benefit of themselves and their foreign customers; foreign and domestic speculators and swindlers; and rich and predatory money lenders. In that dark crew of financial pirates there are those who would cut a man’s throat to get a dollar out of his pocket; there are those who send money into states to buy votes to control our legislatures; there are those who maintain International propaganda for the purpose of deceiving us into granting of new concessions which will permit them to cover up their past misdeeds and set again in motion their gigantic train of crime. These twelve private credit monopolies were deceitfully and disloyally foisted upon this Country by the bankers who came here from Europe and repaid us our hospitality by undermining our American institutions. Those bankers took money out of this Country to finance Japan in a war against Russia. They created a reign of terror in Russia with our money in order to help that war along. They instigated the separate peace between Germany and Russia, and thus drove a wedge between the Allies in the World War. They financed Trotsky’s passage from New York to Russia so that he might assist in the destruction of the Russian Empire. They fomented and instigated the Russian Revolution, and placed a large fund of American dollars at Trotsky’s disposal in one of their branch banks in Sweden so that through him Russian homes might be thoroughly broken up and Russian children flung far and wide from their natural protectors. They have since begun breaking up of American homes and the dispersal of American children. … The Wilson administration, under the tutelage of those sinister Wall Street figures who stood behind Colonel House, established here in our free Country the worm-eaten monarchical institution of the “King’s Bank” to control us from the top downward, and to shackle us from the cradle to the grave. … Every effort has been made by the Fed to conceal its powers—but the truth is—the Fed has usurped the Government. It controls everything here and it controls all of our foreign relations. It makes and breaks governments at will. No man and no body of men is more entrenched in power than the arrogant credit monopoly which operated the Fed. … Mr. Chairman, when the Fed was passed, the people of these United States did not perceive that a world system was being set up here … and that this country was to supply the financial power to an “international superstate.” A superstate controlled by international bankers, and international industrialists acting together to enslave the world for their own pleasure?//%Author%Louis T. McFadden//%Who%Congressman and Chairman of the Committee on Banking and Currency//%Source%10 June 1932, in a speech to the House of Representatives, Congressional Record, pp. 12595–12603; see also Congressman Louis T. McFadden on the Federal Reserve Corporation: Remarks in Congress, 1934, reprinted by the Arizona Caucus Club, 1978//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%How can we account for our present situation unless we believe that men high in our government are concentrating to deliver us to disaster? This must be the product of a great conspiracy, a conspiracy on a scale so immense as to dwarf any previous such venture in the history of man. A conspiracy of infamy so black that, when it is finally exposed, its principals shall be forever deserving of the maledictions of all honest men. Who constitutes the highest circles of this conspiracy? About that we cannot be sure. We are convinced that Dean Acheson, who steadfastly serves the interests of nations other than his own, the friend of Alger Hiss, who supported him in his hour of retribution, who contributed to his defense fund, must be high on the roster. The President? He is their captive. … He is only dimly aware of what is going on. … What is the objective of the great conspiracy? I think it is clear from what has occurred and is now occurring: to diminish the United States in world affairs, to weaken us militarily, to confuse our spirit with talk of surrender in the Far East and to impair our will to resist evil. To what end? To the end that we shall be contained, frustrated and finally: fall victim to Soviet intrigue from within and Russian military might from without.//%Author%Senator Joseph McCarthy//%Source%Speech delivered before the Senate, 14 June 1951, Congressional Record, 82d Cong. 1st sess. vol. 97, pt. 5, p. 6602.//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%A significant portion of the American public is yet to become aware of the “Invisible Government of Monetary Power,” although this knowledge is common in Europe. Americans still believe that they are working toward a better way of life. Surreptitiously, however, social customs and forms of administration in the United States are being carefully and gradually modified. The change from one type of culture to another is thus accomplished without arousing serious public challenge. The stark truth is that America is now passing from a Constitutional Republic into a totalitarian, world-wide government. World dominion is the ages-old dream of the mattoids who have mastered the science of control over people. Their success in the United States is directly related to two central issues: (1) transfer of money control from the people into the hands of an international banking combine, and (2) creation of a complex and confusing judicial system designed to frustrate justice.//%Author%Archibald E. Roberts, Lt.Col. AUS, ret.//%Source%Committee to Restore the Constitution, testimony at a public hearing, Wisconsin State Legislature’s House of Representatives, Why America is Bankrupt, 1971//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Those of us who teach political science on the college and university level find ourselves seriously handicapped by the lack of textbooks and carefully prepared historical research on one of the most important phenomena of our time, namely, the amazing alliance which has been growing for more than half a century between the leaders of the world-wide Communist movement and the leaders of some of the most powerful banks and industries of Europe and America. That such an alliance should even exist, came as an intellectual shock to this writer. It seemed irrational, an ideological contraction, a conflict of interests. Nevertheless, the more I have researched the matter, the more convinced I have become that the alliance is not only a reality, but that also herein might be found the Gordian knot which must be cut before we can solve some of the world’s most critical problems.//%Author%Dr. Harold Pease, Ph.D.//%Who%Professor of History at Palo Verde College, and former advisor to the Constitutional Subcommittee of the Judiciary Committee of the U.S. Senate//%Source%The Communist-Capitalist Alliance//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%What we must say to the crowd is:—We worship a God, but it is the God that one worships without superstition. To you, Sovereign Grand Inspectors General, we say, so that you can repeat it to the Brethren of the 32nd, 31st and 30th degrees: —The Masonic religion must be, by all of us initiates of the high grades, maintained in the purity of the Luciferian doctrine. If Lucifer were not God, Adonai (the God of the Christians) whose deeds prove his cruelty, perfidy and hatred of man, his barbarism and repulsion of science—if Lucifer were not God, would Adonai and his priests slander him? Yes, Lucifer is God, and unfortunately so is Adonai. For the eternal law is that there is no splendor without shadow, no beauty without ugliness, no white without black, because the absolute can only exist as two, because darkness is necessary to light to serve as its compliment, as the pedestal is necessary to the statue, as the brake to the locomotive. … The true and pure philosophical religion is the belief in Lucifer, equal to Adonai, but Lucifer, God of Light and God of Good, is fighting for humanity against Adonai, God of Darkness and God of Evil.//%Author%Albert Pike//%Who%Confederate General, 33rd Degree Mason and Sovereign Pontiff of Universal Freemasonry//%Source%14 July 1889, in an address to the 23 Confederated Supreme Councils of the World, quoted in Woman and Child in Universal Freemasonry (Paris & Lyon: Delhomme & Briguet, Editeurs, 1894), pp. 587–589, translated by Eric Serejski; see also Occult Theocrasy (1933), 2 vols., reprint (Hawthorne, California: The Christian Book Club of America. 1980), p. 233//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Throughout time, the idea of a group of wise and enlightened beings working behind the scenes to guide our planet has been conveyed in spiritual teachings, in literature and myth. This group, known by various names such as the spiritual Hierarchy, the Masters of the Wisdom, and the Elder Brothers has ever come forth in times of crisis and today will be no different. … They work primarily behind the scenes, protected in the remote areas of Earth, and it is futile, therefore, to seek them out upon the physical plane. They are individuals of extraordinary capacities. … The Hierarchy works ceaselessly and could be compared to a great army working for world upliftment. They are the inspiration for the major changes being implemented in the world yet they take no credit for the work that they do. Through the process of spiritual impression they influence those leaders and progressive thinkers whose minds and hearts are receptive to the new and forward looking, incoming ideas. Their work extends to all aspects of our planetary life—politics, education, religion, art, science, psychology and economics. … There are periods of major opportunity of which the Hierarchy takes advantage and this present period is one of major opportunity. In the coming decades members of the Hierarchy will begin the process of externalization, moving outward onto the physical plane. They will again walk among humanity to help usher in the new age and prepare human consciousness for the reappearance of the World Teacher. This externalization process will cause tremendous changes. Because of the Hierarchy’s enlightened leadership, the course of human affairs will be irrevocably turned towards the light and towards the realization of the divine Plan.//%Author%“The Hierarchy of Light”//%Source%a pamphlet published by Lucist Trust (formerly Lucifer Publishing Company), which currently has offices in the United Nations headquarters building, and of which Robert Mueller, former Assistant Secretary General of the U.N., is a member, as taken from their web site, http://www.lucistrust.org/epamphlets/hol.shtml (8 Mar. 2006)//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%The pollsters have recently been forced to admit that the majority of Americans are against the re-election of George Bush. Two wars, thousands of dead human beings, and nine million lost jobs later and people are beginning to realize that something is very wrong. In spite of this gradual awakening most registered voters continue to depend on TV for their news and they are kept woefully in the dark about issues like election reform and touch screen voting. The media has gone to great lengths to foster an illusion of legitimacy and normalcy surrounding the electoral process. People have been intentionally lead to believe that their vote counts and Bush could actually be booted out of office on Election Day. No way is Bush going to lose, it just can’t happen. The 2004 election has already been rigged. The corporations and the military industrial complex have bought them selves a government and they aren’t going to let some silly little presidential election jeopardize their investment.//%Author%Schuyler Ebbets//%Source%“The 2004 Election Has Already Been Rigged,” posted on www.thepeoplesvoice.org, 2 Sep. 2003//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%I myself was to experience how easily one is taken in by a lying and censored press and radio in a totalitarian state. … Though unlike most Germans I had daily access to foreign newspapers … and though I listened regularly to the BBC and other foreign broadcasts, my job necessitated the spending of many hours a day in combing the German press, checking the German radio, conferring with Nazi officials and going to party meetings. It was surprising and sometimes consternating to find that notwithstanding the opportunities I had to learn the facts and despite one’s inherent distrust of what one learned from Nazi sources, a steady diet over the years of falsifications and distortions made a certain impression on one’s mind and often misled it. … I would meet with the most outlandish assertions from seemingly educated and intelligent persons. It was obvious they were parroting some piece of nonsense they had heard on the radio or read in the newspapers. … Sometimes one was tempted to say as much, but on such occasions one was met with such a stare of incredulity, such a shock of silence, as if one had blasphemed the Almighty, that one realized how useless it was even to try to make contact with a mind which had become warped and for whom the facts of life had become what Hitler and Goebbels, with their cynical disregard for truth, said they were.//%Author%William Shirer//%Who%who lived in Nazi Germany throughout most of the 1930s, and wrote about it//%Source%in The Rise and Fall of the Third Reich (1959)//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Two years after the fact of 9/11, we should ask ourselves … what is the worst thing that can happen in our country? The worst thing that can happen is, perhaps—and this is my personal opinion—two steps. The first step would be a nexus between weapons of mass destruction of any variety. It could be chemical, it could be biological, it could be some nuclear device; and terrorism. Terrorists or any human being who is committed to the proposition of terror, try to just create casualties, not for the purpose of annihilation, but to terrify a population. … That goes to step number two, which is that the western world, the free world, loses what it cherishes most, and that is freedom and liberty we’ve seen for a couple of hundred years in this grand experiment that we call democracy. Now, in a practical sense, what does that mean? It means the potential of a weapon of mass destruction and a terrorist, massive casualty-producing event somewhere in the western world—it may be in the United States of America—that causes our population to question our own Constitution and to begin to militarize our country in order to avoid a repeat of another mass-casualty-producing event. Which, in fact, then begins to potentially unravel the fabric of our Constitution. Two steps: very, very important.//%Author%Tommy Franks//%Who%U.S. General who led the planning and execution of the attacks on Afghanistan in October 2001 and Iraq in March 2003//%Source%speaking in an interview with Marvin R. Shanken, in the Nov./Dec. 2003 issue of Cigar Aficionado//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%A detailed explanation of this strategy appeared in print in the 1950s as two chapters in a textbook used by the Communist Party in Czechoslovakia. Written by Communist Party “theoretician” Jan Kozak, this textbook was used in a training program on how to seize power in countries that have representative government. The strategy involves a political “pincers” movement—and these are the terms Kozak uses to describe it—a “pincers” movement applying political pressure “from above” and “from below.” Pressure from above is created when agents inside the government marked for takeover bring forward recommendations for new big government/police state legislation. This legislation will be promoted as a solution to some kind of national problem, but that will be a ruse. The hidden objective will be to expand the power of the bureaucracy and to move the country closer to the ultimate goal of total government.//%Author%G. Edward Griffin//%Source%The New American, vol. 12, no. 19 (16 Sept. 1996), p. 55//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%In the past, politicians promised to create a better world. They had different ways of achieving this. But their power and authority came from the optimistic visions they offered to their people. Those dreams failed. And today, people have lost faith in ideologies. Increasingly, politicians are seen simply as managers of public life. But now, they have discovered a new role that restores their power and authority. Instead of delivering dreams, politicians now promise to protect us from nightmares. They say that they will rescue us from dreadful dangers that we cannot see and do not understand. And the greatest danger of all is international terrorism. A powerful and sinister network, with sleeper cells in countries across the world. A threat that needs to be fought by a war on terror. But much of this threat is a fantasy, which has been exaggerated and distorted by politicians. Its a dark illusion that has spread unquestioned through governments around the world, the security services, and the international media. … This is a series of films about how and why that fantasy was created, and who it benefits. At the heart of the story are two groups the American neoconservatives, and the radical Islamists. Both were idealists who were born out of the failure of the liberal dream to build a better world. And both had a very similar explanation for what caused that failure. These two groups have changed the world, but not in the way that either intended. Together, they created today’s nightmare vision of a secret, organized evil that threatens the world. A fantasy that politicians then found restored their power and authority in a disillusioned age. And those with the darkest fears became the most powerful.//%Author%Adam Curtis//%Source%Introduction to the BBC documentary “The Power of Nightmares,” originally aired on BBC 2, 20 Oct. 2004, 9 p.m.; written and produced by Adam Curtis//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%The real menace of our republic is this invisible government which like a giant octopus sprawls its slimy length over city, state and nation. Like the octopus of real life, it operates under cover of a self created screen. … It seizes in its long and powerful tentacles our executive officers, our legislative bodies, our schools, our courts, our newspapers, and every agency created for the public protection. … To depart from mere generalizations, let me say that the head of this octopus are the Rockefellers Standard Oil interests and a small group of powerful banking houses generally referred to as the “international bankers.” The little coterie of powerful international bankers virtually run the United States government for their own selfish purposes. They practically control both political parties, write political platforms, make cats paws of party leaders, use the leading men of private organizations, and resort to every device to place in nomination for high public office only such candidates as will be amenable to the dictates of corrupt big business. … These international bankers and Rockefellers Standard Oil interests control the majority of newspapers and magazines in this country.//%Author%John F. Hylan//%Who%Mayor of New York City//%Source%26 Mar. 1922, in New York Times//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Corrupt the young, get them away from religion. Get them interested in sex. Make them superficial, destroy their ruggedness. Get control of all means of publicity and thereby: Get the peoples’ mind off their government by focusing their attention on athletics, sexy books and plays, and other trivialities. Divide the people into hostile groups by constantly harping on controversial matters of no importance. Destroy the peoples faith in their natural leaders by holding up the latter to ridicule, contempt and obloquy. Always preach true democracy but seize power as fast and as ruthlessly as possible. Encourage government extravagance, destroy its credit, produce fear with rising prices, inflation and general discontent. Foment unnecessary strikes in vital industries, encourage civil disorders and foster a soft and lenient attitude on the part of government towards such disorders. By specious argument cause the breakdown of the old moral virtues: honesty, sobriety, continence, faith in the pledged word, ruggedness. Cause the registration of all firearms on some pretext, with the view of confiscating them and leaving the population defenseless.//%Author%Vladimir Ilich Lenin//%Source%1921//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%The rise of political correctness has coincided with the fall of Western cultural norms. Few recognize the connection between the two trends. The connection is called Cultural Communism. What we here in the United States and in Christian Europe are actually witnessing is the planned destruction of Western Civilization. It is no accident. In 1917, when the Bolsheviks came to power in Russia, their attack was economic and political. Only after they had seized power did they turn to destroying the Christian-based culture of the West. With the political correctness movement we see the reverse—an attack on the Christian culture so that the communists can take over. And cultural bolshevism is winning while Christian leaders wring their hands. In a recent speech to a meeting of the World Council of Churches, Anglican Archbishop Dr. George Carey of Canterbury said: “For much of this century, the Western church, especially in Europe, has accepted the decline as the inevitable result of secularism.” True; but he failed to identify the drive force behind the slide. Nature abhors a vacuum. When one culture dies, it is replaced by another until nothing is left of the former. And when Western Christian culture is destroyed, it will be replaced by chaos, anarchy and violence as a norm. All this without any casualties on the side of the conspirators. Cultural Communism encompasses all of the modernist changes that have invaded America including—but not limited to—multiculturalism, feminism, racial and gender quotas, school busing based on race and so forth. How far we have sunk into the morass of this Cultural Communism in less than 50 years is easily identifiable—and frightening. As essayist William S. Lind says: “If a man from America of the 1950s were suddenly introduced into America in the 1990s, he would hardly recognize it as the same country. He would be in immediate danger of getting mugged, carjacked or worse, because he would not have learned to live in constant fear.” Again, this is not by accident. Every step in the decline of Western culture has been planned for years. … One of the main targets of Cultural Communism is Christianity. Some leaders, such as the archbishop of Canterbury quoted above, witness the decline as a natural force. They unwittingly help the communists. Others see the planned destruction without specifically identifying the enemy or suggesting practical ways of resisting … And there is a key part of the problem—the inability of leaders to admit that these incessant attacks on our culture are part of a plan—a conspiracy. … The hour grows late. We must identify the enemy and fight him, even when that means punishment by the powers-that-be. We must call this attack what it is—a deliberate effort to destroy all that made us the most powerful country in the world in order to turn us into the field workers of the coming Global Plantation.//%Author%F. C. Blahut//%Source%“Communism Isn’t Dead, It’s Just Been Renamed”//%end% ============================================================================ DONE 14-Apr-08 %start%%cat=Conspiracy,NWO,Psycho-Politics//%quote%While outlining a not-yet-titled book about the emerging social alternatives, I thought again about the peculiar form of this movement; its atypical leadership, the patient intensity of its adherents, their unlikely successes. It suddenly struck me that in their sharing of strategies, their linkage, and their recognition of each other by subtle signals, the participants were not merely cooperating with one another. They were in collusion. It -- this movement -- is a conspiracy! … There are legions of conspirators. They are in corporations, universities, and hospitals, on the faculties of public schools, in factories and doctors’ offices, in state and federal agencies, on city councils, and the White House staff, in state legislatures, in volunteer organizations, in virtually all arenas of policy making in the country.//%Author%Marilyn Ferguson//%Who%member of the Association of Humanistic Psychology, the Association of Transpersonal Psychology, and is a member of the board of directors of the Institute of Noetic Science//%Source%The Open Conspiracy: Blue Prints for a World Revolution: The Aquarian Conspiracy (1980)//%end%// %start%%cat=Illuminati,NWO//%quote%I am proud to be known to the world as the founder of the Illuminati.//%Author%Adam Weishaupt//%end% %start%%cat=Illuminati,NWO//%quote%There is sufficient evidence that a number of societies, of the Illuminati, have been established in this land of Gospel light and civil liberty, which were first organized from the grand society, in France. They are doubtless secretly striving to undermine all our ancient institutions, civil and sacred. These societies are closely leagued with those of the same Order, in Europe; they have all the same object in view. The enemies of all order are seeking our ruin. Should infidelity generally prevail, our independence would fall of course. Our republican government would be annihilated.//%Author%Joseph Willard//%Who%President of Harvard University//%Source%4 July 1812, A Sermon Preached in Lancaster … on the Anniversary of Our National Independence … Before the Washington Benevolent Societies of Lancaster and Guildhall (Windsor, Vermont: Thomas M. Pomroy, 1812), pp. 14–15//%end% %start%%cat=Illuminati,NWO//%quote%The great strength of our Order lies in its concealment; let it never appear in any place in its own name, but always concealed by another name, and another occupation. None is fitter than the lower degrees of Freemasonry; the public is accustomed to it, expects little from it, and therefore takes little notice of it. Next to this, the form of a learned or literary society is best suited to our purpose, and had Freemasonry not existed, this cover would have been employed; and it may be much more than a cover, it may be a powerful engine in our hands. … A Literary Society is the most proper form for the introduction of our Order into any state where we are yet strangers.//%Author%Adam Weishaupt//%Source%quoted in John Robinson’s Proofs of a Conspiracy, 1795, reprinted by Western Islands, Boston, 1967, p. 112//%end% %start%%cat=Illuminati,NWO//%quote%If the sincere and thoughtful Mason would “take notice” of the symbolism and the use made everywhere in the Lodge of the word “Light,” and remember that the real Initiates are called also “the Illuminati.”//%Author%J.D. Buck//%Who%32nd degree Mason//%Source%The Genius of Freemasonry and the Twentieth Century Crusade (1940)//%end% %start%%cat=Illuminati,NWO//%quote%For the Order wishes to be secret, and to work in silence, for thus it is better secured from the oppression of the ruling powers, and because this secrecy gives a greater zest to the whole.//%Author%Adam Weishaupt//%end% %start%%cat=Communism,Conspiracy,NWO//%quote%I think the Communist conspiracy is merely a branch of a much bigger conspiracy! … I would certainly like to find out who is really running things.//%Author%Dr. Bella Dodd//%Who%former member of the National Committee of the U.S. Communist Party//%Source%in The Naked Capitalist (Salt Lake City, 1970), by W. Cleon Skousen//%end% %start%%cat=Conspiracy,NWO//%quote%It is ironical that the only nation which affirmatively expresses a dependence upon and belief in Almighty God in its birth certificate, should now be in mortal combat for its very existence with a godless conspiracy intent upon conquering the world, and reverting human society to the hazards and indignities of the Dark Ages.//%Author%Loyd Wright//%Who%Former President of the American Bar Association//%Source%20 Nov. 1961, BYU Speeches of the Year, 1961//%end% %start%%cat=CFR,Communists,NWO//%quote%After the insiders have established the United Socialist States of America (in fact if not in name), the next step is the Great Merger of all nations of the world into a dictatorial world government. … The Insiders’ code word for the world superstate is “new world order,” a phrase often used by Richard Nixon. The Council on Foreign Relations states in its Study No. 7: “The U.S. must strive to: A. BUILD A NEW INTERNATIONAL ORDER.” … A world government has always been the object of the Communists.//%Author%Gary Allen//%Source%None Dare Call It Conspiracy, p. 121//%end% %start%%cat=CFR,Globalism,NWO,UN//%quote%The term “Internationalism” has been popularized in recent years to cover an interlocking financial, political, and economic world force for the purpose of establishing a World Government. Today Internationalism is heralded from pulpit and platform as a “League of Nations” or a “Federated Union” to which the United States must surrender a definite part of its National Sovereignty. The World Government plan is being advocated under such alluring names as the “New International Order,” “The New World Order,” “World Union Now,” “World Commonwealth of Nations,” “World Community,” etc. All the terms have the same objective; however, the line of approach may be religious or political according to the taste or training of the individual.//%Author%//%Source%Excerpt from “A Memorial to be Addressed to the House of Bishops and the House of Clerical and Lay Deputies of the Protestant Episcopal Church in General Convention,” October 1940//%end% %start%%cat=Globalism,NWO//%quote%It cannot happen without U.S. participation, as we are the most significant single component. Yes, there will be a New World Order, and it will force the United States to change its perceptions.//%Author%Henry Kissinger//%Source%World Affairs Council Press Conference, Regent Beverly Wilshire Hotel, 19 April 1994//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%The old world order died with the setting of that day’s sun and a new world order is being born while I speak, with birth-pangs so terrible that it seems almost incredible that life could come out of such fearful suffering and such overwhelming sorrow.//%Author%Nicholas Murray Butler//%Who%President of Columbia University, Nobel Peace Prize winner, nominee for Vice President in 1912, and president of the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace//%Source%speaking in 1915//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%The existing order is breaking down at a very rapid rate, and the main uncertainty is whether mankind can exert a positive role in shaping a new world order or is doomed to await collapse in a passive posture. We believe a new order will be born no later than early in the next century and that the death throes of the old and the birth pangs of the new will be a testing time for the human species.//%Author%Richard A. Falk//%Who%Professor of International Law and Practice at Princeton University//%Source%1975//%end% %start%%cat=Communism,NWO,Revolution//%quote%I don’t care what becomes of Russia. To hell with it. All this is only the road to a World Revolution.//%Author%Vladimir Ilich Lenin//%Source%1918//%end% %start%%cat=Nazi,NWO,Socialism//%quote%Believe me, National Socialism would not be worth anything if it were to be confined to Germany and did not secure the rule of the superior race over the whole world for at least one or two thousand years.//%Author%Adolf Hitler//%Source%in A History of National Socialism (1935), by Konrad Heiden//%end% %start%%cat=Banking,Fed,Money,NWO//%quote%Mr. Chairman, I see no reason why citizens of the United States should be terrorized into surrendering their property to the International Bankers who own and control the Federal Reserve.//%Author%Louis T. McFadden//%Source%9 March 1933, in his Speech to the House of Representatives, Congressional Record//%end% %start%%cat=Banking,Fed,NWO//%quote%It was not accidental [the 1929 stock-market “crash”]. It was a carefully contrived occurrence. … The international bankers sought to bring about a condition of despair here so that they might emerge as rulers of us all.//%Author%Louis T. McFadden//%end% %start%%cat=Banking,Fed,NWO//%quote%When the President signs this act [Federal Reserve Act of 1913], the invisible government by the money power—proven to exist by the Monetary Trust Investigation—will be legalized. The new law will create inflation whenever the trusts want inflation. From now on, depressions will be scientifically created.//%Author%Charles A. Lindbergh, Sr.//%Source%U.S. Senate, Nov. 1912//%end% %start%%cat=Banking,Fed,NWO//%quote%We have what is known as the Federal Reserve Bank System. That system is not owned by the Government. Many people think that it is because it says “Federal Reserve.” It belongs to private banks, private corporations. So we have farmed out to the Federal Reserve Banking System that which is owned exclusively, wholly, one hundred percent to the private banks—we have farmed out to them the privilege of issuing the Government’s money!//%Author%Wright Patman//%Source%Congressional Record (29 Sep. 1941)//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Somehow we find it hard to sell our values, namely that the rich should plunder the poor.//%Author%John Foster Dulles//%Who%former Secretary of State//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%I am one of those who do not believe that a national debt is a national blessing, but rather a curse to a republic; inasmuch as it is calculated to raise around the administration a moneyed aristocracy dangerous to the liberties of the country.//%Author%Andrew Jackson//%Source%in a letter to T. H. Colman, 26 April 1824//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%The surest way to destroy a nation is to debauch its currency.//%Author%Vladimir Ilich Lenin//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Those who own the country ought to govern it.//%Author%John Jay//%Who%American statesman and first Chief Justice of U.S. Supreme Court//%end% %start%%cat=Democracy,NWO//%quote%Democracy is based on the principle of one person, one vote. The market functions on the principle of one dollar, one vote. Consequently, under conditions of unequal economic power, a society ruled by the market is a society ruled by those who have the most money—the antithesis of democracy. //%Author%Dr. David Korten//%Who%founder of the People-Centered Development Forum//%end% %start%%cat=Democracy,NWO//%quote%We can have democracy in this country, or we can have great wealth concentrated in the hands of a few, but we can’t have both.//%Author%Louis Brandeis//%end% %start%%cat=Democracy,NWO//%quote%But we’re not a democracy. It’s a terrible misunderstanding and a slander to the idea of democracy to call us that. In reality, we’re a plutocracy: a government by the wealthy.//%Author%Ramsey Clark//%Who%former U.S. Attorney General//%Source%interview in The Sun, August 2001//%end% %start%%cat=Banking,NWO//%quote%For the first time in its history, Western Civilization is in danger of being destroyed internally by a corrupt, criminal ruling cabal which is centered around the Rockefeller interests, which include elements from the Morgan, Brown, Rothschild, Du Pont, Harriman, Kuhn-Loeb, and other groupings as well. This junta took control of the political, financial, and cultural life of America in the first two decades of the twentieth century.//%Author%Professor Carroll Quigley//%Source%Tragedy and Hope: A History of the World in Our Time (1966)//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%They that will be rich fall into temptation and a snare, and into many foolish and hurtful lusts, which drown men in destruction and perdition. For the love of money is the root of all evil.//%Author%Paul the Apostle//%Source%in his first epistle to Timothy, chapter 6, verse 9–10, Holy Bible (King James Version); emphasis added//%end% %start%%cat=Communism,NWO//%quote%The drive of the Rockefellers and their allies is to create a one-world government combining supercapitalism and Communism under the same tent, all under their control. … Do I mean conspiracy? Yes I do. I am convinced there is such a plot, international in scope, generations old in planning, and incredibly evil in intent.//%Author%Larry P. McDonald//%Who%U.S. Congressman, 1976, killed in the Korean Airlines 747 that was shot down by the Soviets//%Source%in “Introduction” to The Rockefeller File, by Gary Allen (1975)//%end% %start%%cat=Communism,NWO//%quote%There also exists another alliance—at first glance a strange one, a surprising one—but if you think about it, in fact, one which is well grounded and easy to understand. This is the alliance between our Communist leaders and your capitalists. This alliance is not new. … We observe continuous and steady support by the businessmen of the West of the Soviet Communist leaders.//%Author%Aleksandr Solzhenitsyn//%Who%famed Russian author, lecturer, historian, intellectual, and recipient of a Nobel Prize//%Source%speaking in the Ballroom of the Hilton in Washington, D.C., on June 30, 1975//%end% %start%%cat=Banking,Communism,NWO//%quote%Open the books … and you will be staggered to see how much American money has been taken from the United States Treasury for the benefit of Russia. Find out what business has been transacted for the State Bank of Soviet Russia, by its correspondent, the Chase Bank of New York.//%Author%Louis T. McFadden//%Source%1933//%end% %start%%cat=Communism,NWO//%quote%David Rockefeller, President of Chase Manhattan Bank, briefed President Johnson today on his recent meeting with Premier Nikita Khrushchev of Russia.//%Author%Chicago Tribune//%Source%article, published September 1964//%end% %start%%cat=Communism,NWO//%quote%Behind the October Revolution there are more influential personalities than the thinkers and executors of Marxism.//%Author%Vladimir Ilich Lenin//%Who%Bolshevik leader and mass murderer of millions of Russians//%Source%1921//%end% %start%%cat=Communism,NWO//%quote%My congratulations on the occasion of the 60th anniversary of the October Revolution.//%Author%David Rockefeller//%Source%message of congratulations to the Communist tyrants in the Kremlin, 1977//%end% %start%%cat=Communism,NWO//%quote%Of course, members of the dynastic banking families had been financing the Russian-oriented revolutionists for many years. Trotsky, in his biography, refers to some of these loans from British financiers going back as far as 1907. By 1917 the major subsidies for the revolution were being arranged by Sir George Buchanan and Lord Alfred Milner (of the Morgan-Rothschild-Rhodes confederacy). Milner, it will be recalled, was the founder of England’s secret “Round Table” group which started the Royal Institute for International Affairs in England and the Council on Foreign Relations in the United States. One American source gave Trotsky, Lenin and the other Communist leaders around twenty million dollars for the final triumph of Bolshevism in Russia. This was Jacob Schiff of Kuhn, Loeb and Company.//%Author%W. Cleon Skousen//%Source%The Naked Capitalist (Salt Lake City, 1970), pp. 40–41//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%The Rothschilds can start or prevent wars. Their word could make or break empires.//%Author%Chicago Evening American//%Source%3 December 1923//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%The Rothschild family is the head of the organization in which I entered in Colorado. All the Occult Brotherhoods are part of it. It is a Lucifer Organization to install his reign in the whole world. … Supposedly the Rothschilds have personal dealings with the Devil. I have personally been in his villa and have experienced it. And I know it is true.//%Author%John Todd//%Who%of the Masonic Council of Thirteen//%Source%Progress (January 1991)//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%A theory that a conspiracy has been working consciously for many centuries is not very plausible unless one attributes to them a religious unity. That is tantamount to regarding them as Satanists engaged in the worship and service of supernatural evil. The directors of the conspiracy must see or otherwise directly perceive manifestations which convince them of the existence and power of Lucifer. And since subtle conspirators must be very shrewd men, not likely to be deceived by auto-suggestion, hypnosis, or drugs, we should have to conclude that they probably are in contact with a force of pure evil.//%Author%Professor Revilo P. Oliver//%Source%Conspiracy or Degeneracy?//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Lucifer comes to give us the final … Luciferic initiation … that many people now and in the days ahead, will be facing—for it is an initiation into the New Age. … No one will enter the New World Order unless he or she will make a pledge to worship Lucifer. No one will enter the New Age unless he will take a Luciferian initiation.//%Author%David Spangler//%Who%on the Board of Directors of Planetary Citizens, United Nations//%Source%“Reflections on the Christ,” quoted in Unicorn in the Sanctuary, by Randy England, 1978//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%When the Mason learns that the key to the warrior on the block is the proper application of the dynamo of living power, he has learned the mystery of his Craft. The seething energies of Lucifer are in his hands, and before he may step onward and upward, he must prove his ability to properly apply energy. He must follow in the footsteps of his forefather, Tubal-Cain, who with the mighty strength of the war god hammered his sword into a plowshare.//%Author%Manley P. Hall//%Source%The Lost Keys of Freemasonry, p. 124//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%The governments of the present day have to deal not merely with other governments, with emperors, kings and ministers, but also with the secret societies which have everywhere their unscrupulous agents, and can at the last moment upset all the governments’ plans.//%Author%Benjamin Disraeli//%Source%1876//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Governments do not govern, but merely control the machinery of government, being themselves controlled by the hidden hand.//%Author%Benjamin Disraeli//%end% %start%%cat=History,NWO//%quote%History is an account mostly false, of events mostly unimportant, which are brought about by rulers, mostly knaves, and soldiers, mostly fools.//%Author%Ambrose Bierce//%end% %start%%cat=History,NWO//%quote%History is written by those who win and those who dominate.//%Author%Edward Said//%Who%literary theorist, critic and outspoken Palestinian activist//%end% %start%%cat=History,NWO//%quote%History is fables agreed upon.//%Author%Francois Voltaire//%Who%French writer, deist and philosopher, 1694-1778//%end% %start%%cat=History,NWO//%quote%There are two histories : official history, lying, and then secret history, where you find the real causes of events.//%Author%Honoré de Balzac//%Who%French novelist//%end% %start%%cat=History,NWO//%quote%Who controls the past controls the future. Who controls the present controls the past.//%Author%George Orwell//%Who%novelist and political and cultural commentator//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%If voting changed anything, they would make it illegal.//%Author%Emma Goldman//%Who%an “anarcho-communist” who has been lionized as an iconic “rebel woman” feminist//%end% %start%%cat=Media,NWO,Press//%quote%In March, 1915, the J.P. Morgan interests, the steel, shipbuilding, and powder interest, and their subsidiary organizations, got together 12 men high up in the newspaper world and employed them to select the most influential newspapers in the United States and sufficient number of them to control generally the policy of the daily press. … They found it was only necessary to purchase the control of 25 of the greatest papers. An agreement was reached; the policy of the papers was bought, to be paid for by the month; an editor was furnished for each paper to properly supervise and edit information regarding the questions of preparedness, militarism, financial policies, and other things of national and international nature considered vital to the interests of the purchasers.//%Author%Oscar Callaway//%Who%U.S. Congressman//%Source%Congressional Record (1917)//%end% %start%%cat=Media,NWO,Press//%quote%The corporate grip on opinion in the United States is one of the wonders of the Western world. No First World country has ever managed to eliminate so entirely from its media all objectivity—much less dissent.//%Author%Gore Vidal//%Who%novelist, essayist, playwright, and provocateur//%end% %start%%cat=Media,NWO,Press//%quote%One of our best-kept secrets is the degree to which a handful of huge corporations control the flow of information in the United States. Whether it is television, radio, newspapers, magazines, books or the Internet, a few giant conglomerates are determining what we see, hear and read. And the situation is likely to become much worse as a result of radical deregulation efforts by the Bush administration and some horrendous court decisions. Television is the means by which most Americans get their “news.” Without exception, every major network is owned by a huge conglomerate that has enormous conflicts of interest. … The bottom line is that fewer and fewer huge conglomerates are controlling virtually everything that the ordinary American sees, hears and reads. This is an issue that Congress can no longer ignore.//%Author%U.S. Rep. Bernie Sanders//%Source%“Congress Can No Longer Ignore Corporate Control of the Media,” The Hill (12 June 2002)//%end% %start%%cat=CIA,Media,NWO//%quote%The Central Intelligence Agency owns everyone of any significance in the major media.//%Author%William Colby//%Who%former Director of the CIA//%Source%in Derailing Democracy: The America the Media Don’t Want You to See (2000), by Dave McGowan//%end% %start%%cat=Media,NWO,Press//%quote%We believe the picture painters of the mass media are artfully creating landscapes for us which deliberately hide the real picture. In this book we will show you how to discover the “hidden picture” in the landscapes presented to us daily through newspapers, radio and television.//%Author%Garry Allen//%Source%None Dare Call it Conspiracy, p. 7//%end% %start%%cat=Media,NWO//%quote%Any dictator would admire the uniformity and obedience of the [U.S.] media.//%Author%Noam Chomsky//%Who%Institute Professor Emeritus of Linguistics//%Source%at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology//%end% %start%%cat=Media,NWO,Press//%quote%The man who reads nothing at all is better educated than the man who reads nothing but newspapers.//%Author%Thomas Jefferson//%end% %start%%cat=Media,NWO,Press//%quote%A newspaper has three things to do. One is to amuse, another is to entertain and the rest is to mislead.//%Author%Ernest Bevin//%Who%British Foreign Minister//%Source%at London Conference of Foreign Ministers, 10 Feb. 1946, quoted in The Barnes Review, vol. 5, no. 3 (Washington D.C.: TBR Co., May/June 1999), p. 29//%end% %start%%cat=Media,NWO//%quote%The notion that journalism can regularly produce a product that violates the fundamental interests of media owners and advertisers … is absurd.//%Author%Robert McChesney//%Who%Research Professor in the Institute of Communications Research and the Graduate School of Library and Information Science at the University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign//%end% %start%%cat=Media,NWO,Propaganda//%quote%Hitler’s dictatorship differed in one fundamental point from all its predecessors in history. It was the first dictatorship in the present period of modern technical development, a dictatorship which made complete use of all technical means for the domination of its own country. Through technical devices like the radio and the loud-speaker, eighty million people were deprived of independent thought. It was thereby possible to subject them to the will of one man.//%Author%Albert Speer//%Who%Hitler’s Minister for Armaments//%Source%at his trial after World War II//%end% %start%%cat=Library,NWO,Propaganda//%quote%By establishing reading societies, and subscription libraries, and taking these under our direction, and supplying them through our labors, we may turn the public mind which way we will.//%Author%Adam Weishaupt//%end% %start%%cat=Law,Media,NWO//%quote%Public sentiment is everything. With public sentiment nothing can fail. Without it nothing can succeed. He who molds opinion is greater than he who enacts laws.//%Author%Abraham Lincoln//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%The illusion of freedom [in America] will continue as long as it’s profitable to continue the illusion. At the point where the illusion becomes too expensive to maintain, they will just take down the scenery, they will pull back the curtains, they will move the tables and chairs out of the way and you will see the brick wall at the back of the theater.//%Author%Frank Zappa//%Who%musician and cultural iconoclast//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Most of us here were, at one time or another, active in either the O.S.S., the State Department, or the European Economic Administration. During those times, and without exception, we operated under directives issued by the White House, the substance of which was to the effect that we should make every effort to so alter life in the United States as to make possible a comfortable merger with the Soviet Union. We are continuing to be guided by just such directives.//%Author%H. Rowan Gaither//%Who%President of the Ford Foundation//%Source%1953, quoted in “Applying the ‘Pincers’ Strategy,” The New American, vol. 12, no. 19 (16 Sept. 1996), p. 57//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%The aim of socialism is not only to abolish the present division of mankind into small states and all-national isolation, not only to bring the nations closer to each other, but also to merge them.//%Author%Vladimir Ilich Lenin//%end% %start%%cat=NWO,UN//%quote%The International government of the United Nations, stripped of its legal trimming, then, is really the International Government of the United States and the Soviet Union acting in unison.//%Author%American Jewish Committee’s Magazine//%Source%Commentary, November 1958, p. 376//%end% %start%%cat=NWO,UN//%quote%I am appalled at the extensive evidence indicating that there is today in the UN among the American employees there, the greatest concentration of communists that this Committee has ever encountered. … These people occupy high positions. They have very high salaries and almost all of these people have, in the past, been employees in the U.S. government in high and sensitive positions.//%Author%Senator James O. Eastland//%Source%Activities of U.S. Citizens Employed by the UN (Hearings), Congressional Record (1951)//%end% %start%%cat=America,Communism,NWO,Treason//%quote%There seemed to be no lengths to which some American officials would not go in aiding Russia to master the secret of nuclear fission.//%Author%Major George Racey Jordan USAF, Ret.//%Source%Major Jordan’s Diaries (1952)//%end% %start%%cat=Communism,NWO,UN//%quote%The American people are bound to the people of the Soviet Union in the great alliance of the United Nations. We are determined that nothing shall stop us from sharing with you all that we have.//%Author%Howard C. Peterson//%Who%U.S. Assistant Secretary of War//%Source%testimony during a Senate investigation, led by Senator Styles Bridges, chairman of the Committee on Appropriations 6/47, Congressional Record (1952)//%end% %start%%cat=Communism,NWO,UN//%quote%The time has come to recognize the United Nations for the anti-American, anti-freedom organization that it has become. The time has come for us to cut off all financial help, withdraw as a member, and ask the United Nations to find headquarters location outside the United States that is more in keeping with the philosophy of the majority of voting members, someplace like Moscow or Peking.//%Author%Senator Barry Goldwater//%Source%Congressional Record (1971)//%end% %start%%cat=Communism,NWO,UN//%quote%Indeed, the U.N. is the main Soviet espionage center in this country.//%Author%Jack Anderson//%Source%Washington Post (1971)//%end% %start%%cat=Communism,NWO,UN//%quote%Great popular support and enthusiasm for the United Nations policies should be built up, well organized and fully articulate. But it is necessary to do more than that. The opposition must be rendered so impotent that it will be unable to gather any significant support in the Senate against the United Nations Charter and the treaties which will follow.//%Author%Political Affairs//%Source%(April 1945), the official publication of the American Communist Party (CPUSA)//%end% %start%%cat=Communist,NWO,UN//%quote%From the rostrum of the United Nations, we shall convince the colonial and semicolonial people to liberate themselves and to spread the Communist theory all over the world.//%Author%Soviet General Bondarenko//%Source%lecture at the Frunze Military Academy in Moscow, as revealed by Czech intelligence officer defector, Colonel Jan Bukar at Executive Hearings before the House Committee on Un-American Activities, Soviet Schedule For War, Congressional Record (1953)//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%We have before us the opportunity to forge for ourselves and for future generations a new world order, a world where the rule of law, not the rule of the jungle, governs the conduct of nations. When we are successful, and we will be, we have a real chance at this new world order, an order in which a credible United Nations can use its peacekeeping role to fulfill the promise and vision of the UN’s founders.//%Author%George H. W. Bush//%Source%January 1991//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%At the founding of the United Nations in San Francisco, Nelson Rockefeller was in the forefront of the struggle to establish not only an American system of political and economic security but a new world order.//%Author%New York Times//%Source%(Nov. 1975)//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%The planning of UN can be traced to the “secret steering committee” established by Secretary [of State Cordell] Hull in January 1943. All of the members of this secret committee, with the exception of Hull, a Tennessee politician, were members of the Council on Foreign Relations. They saw Hull regularly to plan, select, and guide the labors of the [State] Department’s Advisory Committee. It was, in effect, the coordinating agency for all the State Department’s postwar planning.//%Author%Professors Laurence H. Shoup and William Minter//%Source%in their study Imperial Brain Trust: The CFR and United States Foreign Policy (Monthly Review Press, 1977)//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%The Communists could succeed if we ever let ourselves be lulled into thinking that they are no longer dangerous to us externally and internally. They would be victorious if we were ever duped by their own nationals or by foolish Americans -- if we were ever duped into believing that they are not aggressive, atheist socialist imperialists. They have proved they never sleep. They have never permanently retreated, and what seems at a particular time to be a cessation of their forward movement or a change in their designs is nothing more than a tactical maneuver on another front.//%Author%Kenneth D. Wells//%Who%President of Valley Forge Freedoms Foundation//%Source%BYU Speech, 30 Apr. 1962, in Speeches, 1962, p. 5//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Those who hope that we shall move away from the socialist path will be greatly disappointed. Every part of our program of perestroika … is fully based on the principle of more socialism and more democracy. ... I would like to be clearly understood ... we, the Soviet people, are for socialism. ... We want more socialism and, therefore, more democracy. ... More socialism means more democracy, openness and collectivism in everyday life. … We will proceed toward better socialism rather than away from it. We are saying this honestly, without trying to fool our own people or the world. Any hopes that we will begin to build a different, non-socialist society and go over to the other camp are unrealistic and futile. Those in the West who expect us to give up socialism will be disappointed. ... It’s my conviction that the human race has entered a stage where we are all dependent on each other. No other country or nation should be regarded in total separation from another, let alone pitted against another. That’s what our communist vocabulary calls internationalism and it means promoting universal human values.//%Author%Mikhail Gorbachev//%Source%Perestroika -- New Thinking for Our Country and the World (1988)//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Further global progress is now possible only through a quest for universal consensus in the movement towards a new world order.//%Author%Mikhail Gorbachev//%Source%in an address to the United Nations, 1988//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Ultimately, our objective is to welcome the Soviet Union back into the world order. Perhaps the world order of the future will truly be a family of nations.//%Author%George H. W. Bush//%Source%Texas A&M University, 1989//%end% 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%We believe we are creating the beginning of a new world order coming out of the collapse of the U.S.-Soviet antagonisms.//%Author%Brent Scowcroft//%Source%in Washington Post (May 1991)//%end% %start%%cat=Nazi,NWO//%quote%National Socialism will use its own revolution for establishing of a new world order.//%Author%Adolf Hitler//%end% %start%%cat=Communism,NWO//%quote%I am a Communist, a convinced Communist! For some that may be a fantasy. But to me it is my main goal.//%Author%Mikhail Gorbachev//%Source%in New York Times, 1989//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%We must establish a new world order based on justice, on equity, and on peace.//%Author%Fidel Castro//%Who%Dictator of Cuba//%Source%to the United Nations, 1979//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%For two centuries we’ve done the hard work of freedom. And tonight we lead the world in facing down a threat to decency and humanity. What is at stake is more than one small country, it is a big idea—a new world order, where diverse nations are drawn together in common cause to achieve the universal aspirations of mankind: peace and security, freedom, and the rule of law. Such is a world worthy of our struggle, and worthy of our children’s future.//%Author%George H. W. Bush//%Source%State of the Union Address, 1991//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%If we do not follow the dictates of our moral compass and stand up for human life, then this lawlessness will threaten the peace and democracy of the emerging new world order we now see, this long dreamed-of vision we’ve all worked toward for so long.//%Author%George H. W. Bush//%Source%January 1991//%end% %start%%cat=Communism,NWO,UN//%quote%But it became clear as time went on that in Mr. Bush’s mind the New World Order was founded on a convergence of goals and interests between the U.S. and the Soviet Union, so strong and permanent that they would work as a team through the U.N. Security Council.//%Author%A. M. Rosenthal//%Source%New York Times, January 1991//%end% %start%%cat=NWO,UN//%quote%It is suggested that the solution lies in the United Nations Security Council. It is interesting to note that each solution it achieves invariably results either in the country involved going communist or vast territories being turned to communist-type socialism. The United Nations is the great Trojan horse within our gates, and we can hope for absolutely no help from that quarter, especially while it promotes and arranges finances, encouragement, and prestige to dissenting groups involved in so-called liberation movements of terrorist revolutionary groups.//%Author%J. Ralph Thompson//%Source%“Our Readers Write,” Ensign, Mar. 1971, p. 73//%end% %start%%cat=Communism,NWO,UN//%quote%The American communists worked energetically and tirelessly to lay the foundations for the United Nations which we were sure would come into existence. … It can be said, without exaggeration, that ever closer relations between our nation and the Soviet Union are an unconditional requirement for the United Nations as a world coalition. … The United Nations is the instrument for victory. Victory is required for the survival of our nation. The Soviet Union is an essential part of the United Nations. Mutual confidence between our country and the Soviet Union and joint work in the leadership of the United Nations are absolutely necessary.//%Author%Earl Browder//%Who%former General Secretary of the U.S. Communist Party//%Source%Victory and After//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%We will succeed in the Gulf. And when we do, the world community will have sent an enduring warning to any dictator or despot, present or future, who contemplates outlaw aggression. The world can therefore seize this opportunity to fulfill the long-held promise of a new world order—where brutality will go unrewarded, and aggression will meet collective resistance.//%Author%George H. W. Bush//%Source%State of the Union Address, 1991//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%The enormous gap between what U.S. leaders do in the world and what Americans think their leaders are doing is one of the great propaganda accomplishments of the dominant political mythology.//%Author%Michael Parenti//%Who%political scientist and author//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%The major function of secrecy in Washington is to keep the U.S. people … from knowing what the nation’s leaders are doing.//%Author%John Stockwell//%Who%U.S. Marine Corps Major, and Chief of Station and National Security Council coordinator for the CIA//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Most people prefer to believe their leaders are just and fair even in the face of evidence to the contrary, because once a citizen acknowledges that the government under which they live is lying and corrupt, the citizen has to choose what he or she will do about it. To take action in the face of a corrupt government entails risks of harm to life and loved ones. To choose to do nothing is to surrender one’s self-image of standing for principles. Most people do not have the courage to face that choice. Hence, most propaganda is not designed to fool the critical thinker but only to give moral cowards an excuse not to think at all.//%Author%Michael Rivero//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%I do not understand this squeamishness about the use of gas. I am strongly in favor of using poisoned gas against uncivilized tribes. The moral effect should be good … and it would spread a lively terror.//%Author%Winston S. Churchill//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%I am in favor of deliberately spreading methodically prepared bacteria among people and animals -- mildew ... to destroy the harvests, anthrax to destroy horses and livestock, and the plague, in order to kill not only entire armies, but also the inhabitants of large regions.//%Author%Winston S. Churchill//%Source%in Pall Mall Gazette, 1924//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Give me the facts, and I will twist them the way I want, to suit my argument.//%Author%Winston S. Churchill//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Patriotism means to stand by the country. It does not mean to stand by the President or any other public official save exactly to the degree in which he himself stands by the country. ... Every man who parrots the cry of “stand by the President” without adding the proviso “so far as he serves the Republic” takes an attitude as essentially unmanly as that of any Stuart royalist who championed the doctrine that the King could do no wrong. No self-respecting and intelligent free man could take such an attitude.//%Author%Theodore Roosevelt//%Source%Works, vol. 21, pp. 316, 321//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%There’s no longer any left or right. There’s the system and the enemies of the system.//%Author%Eduard Limonov//%Who%founder of the National Bolshevik Party in Russia//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Democracy, by definition, is participatory. Without participation, there is no democracy; that’s why the U.S. doesn’t have one. To participate, one must be educated and interested. There you have it.//%Author%Unknown//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%There is a system of terroristic states—the real terror network—that has spread throughout Latin America and elsewhere over the past several decades, and which is deeply rooted in the corporate interest and sustaining political-military-financial propaganda mechanisms of the United States and its allies in the Free World.//%Author%Edward Herman//%Who%Professor Emeritus of Finance at the Wharton School of the University of Pennsylvania//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%The Communist threat from without must not blind us to the Communist threat from within. The latter is reaching into the very heart of America through its espionage agents and a cunning, defiant, and lawless communist party, which is fanatically dedicated to the Marxist cause of world enslavement and destruction of the foundations of our republic.//%Author%J. Edgar Hoover//%Who%Director of the FBI//%Source%in speech entitled “The Faith To Be Free,” on NBC-TV, 1961//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Perhaps Communists had wormed their way so deeply into our government on both the working and planning levels that they were able to exercise an inordinate degree of power in shaping the course of America in the dangerous postwar era. I could not help wondering and worrying whether we were faced with open enemies across the conference table and hidden enemies who sat with us in our most secret councils.//%Author%General Mark Clark//%Source%From the Danube to the Yalu (1954)//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%America is in trouble... not from without, but from within! The Central Government has become too powerful. Citizens fear the Government. This is wrong. This is dangerous! I know the Government covered-up and promulgated LIES about Waco, Ruby Ridge, Pan Am Flight 103, Hoffa, and J.F.K. The Government knew I was right when I called Janet Reno a traitor. Janet Reno sold us out when she refused to investigate a $10-million payoff to the Democratic Party from a general in the Red Chinese Army (no less!). Think about it! And the Government knew that I had known why Reno was forced to betray America! I’m proud that I tried to do something about it! Someday the truth will come out. (I hope China never attacks us!)//%Author%Jim Traficant//%Source%Letter from the prison cell of former Congressman and political prisoner, Jim Traficant, November 2003//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%If this were a dictatorship, it’d be a heck of a lot easier, just so long as I’m the dictator.//%Author%George W. Bush//%Source%shortly before he took office as U.S. President, 21 Dec. 2000, taken from the transcript on CNN’s web site, http://transcripts.cnn.com.//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Terrorism is escalating to the point that Americans soon may have to choose between civil liberties and more intrusive means of protection.//%Author%William S. Cohen//%Who%U.S. Defense Secretary//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Today, America would be outraged if UN troops entered Los Angeles to restore order. Tomorrow they will be grateful! This is especially true if they were told that there were an outside threat from beyond, whether real or “promulgated,” that threatened our very existence. It is then that all peoples of the world will plead to deliver them from this evil. The one thing every man fears is the unknown. When presented with this “scenario,” individual rights will be willingly relinquished for the guarantee of their well-being granted to them by the World Government.//%Author%Dr. Henry Kissinger//%Source%Bilderberg Conference, Evians, France, 1991//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%We need a common enemy to unite us.//%Author%Condoleezza Rice//%Who%U.S. Secretary of State//%Source%March 2000//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Enemies are necessary for the wheels of the U.S. military machine to turn.//%Author%John Stockwell//%Who%U.S. Marine Corps Major, and Chief of Station and National Security Council coordinator for the CIA//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%President Bush told Congress on Wednesday to “untie the hands” of law enforcement officials and arm them with wider legal powers to combat terrorists, saying the groups that struck America two years ago are wounded but still dangerous. He specifically called for expanding use of the federal death penalty, tougher bail restrictions and greater subpoena powers. … Timothy Edgar, legislative counsel for the American Civil Liberties Union, said all three provisions Bush highlighted were included in a draft sequel to the Patriot Act that was made public earlier this year. “What’s relevant is that President Bush is trying to push through these powers that the Justice Department put together as a sequel to the Patriot Act in a way that further undermines civil rights and civil liberties,” Edgar said.//%Author%//%Source%“Bush Urges More Police Powers Vs. Terror”, Yahoo News, September 10, 2003//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%If the New World Order agenda is not realized by the terrorist attacks on America and if Americans don’t agree to give up their weapons and relinquish their sovereignty to the New World Order, the next attack will be the use of chemical, biological and/or atomic warfare against the American people. The architects of the New World Order will not hesitate to use as a last resort an atomic or hydrogen bomb in a major American city.//%Author%Reference Op Ed page//%Source%New York Times, 24 Sept. 2001//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%The interests behind the Bush Administration, such as the CFR, The Trilateral Commission—founded by Brzezinski for David Rockefeller—and the Bilderberger Group, have prepared for and are now moving to implement open world dictatorship within the next five years. They are not fighting against terrorists. They are fighting against citizens.//%Author%Dr. Johannes B. Koeppl, Ph.D.//%Who%former German defense ministry official and advisor to former NATO Secretary General Manfred Werne//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%The Middle East, with two-thirds of the world’s oil and lowest cost, is still where the prize ultimately lies.//%Author%Dick Cheney//%Source%speech to the London Institute of Petroleum, 1999//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Oil resources constitute a stupendous source of strategic power, and one of the greatest material prizes in world history.//%Author%U.S. State Department Memo, 1944//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%If an American is concerned only about his nation, he will not be concerned about the peoples of Asia, Africa, or South America. Is this not why nations engage in the madness of war without the slightest sense of penitence? Is this not why the murder of a citizen of your own nation is a crime, but the murder of citizens of another nation in war is an act of heroic virtue?//%Author%Martin Luther King, Jr.//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%A secret blueprint for US global domination reveals that President Bush and his cabinet were planning a premeditated attack on Iraq to secure regime change even before he took power in January 2001… It has been called a secret blueprint for US global domination. … A small group of people with a plan to remove Saddam Hussein long before George W. Bush was elected president. … And 9/11 provided the opportunity to set it in motion. Not since Mein Kampf has a geopolitical punch been so blatantly telegraphed years ahead of the blow.//%Author%Ted Koppel//%Source%Nightline, 5 March 2003, quoting the Glasgow Sunday Herald (Sept. 15, 2002)//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%An idea is growing in foreign policy circles in Washington … that there is no turning back. We are stuck in Iraq and Afghanistan for 25 to 40 years, we are embedded in our prideful unilateralism, and nothing can return us to more traditional American values and principles of action. The hubristic creators of this “inevitability” planned it this way. … Their failures in Iraq have not stopped the fanatic, power-hungry neoconservatives. … The hard-liners who dominate this administration … have led us to eternal conflict with Muslims.//%Author%Georgie Anne Geyer//%Source%The Washington Times, 16 March 2004, page A19//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Separation of powers is a problem for foreign policy.//%Author%Condoleezza Rice//%Source%March 2000, Houston, TX//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%During my senior year I joined Skull and Bones, a secret society, so secret I can’t say anything more.//%Author%George W. Bush//%Source%in his autobiography entitled A Charge to Keep (1999//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Secret Societies have existed among all peoples, savage and civilized, since the beginning of recorded history... It is beyond question that the secret societies of all ages have exercised a considerable degree of political influence.//%Author%Manley P. Hall//%Who%high level occultist//%Source%The Secret Destiny of America (1944)//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%The government of the Western nations, whether monarchical or republican, had passed into the invisible hands of a plutocracy, international in power and grasp. It was, I venture to suggest, this semi-occult power which … pushed the mass of the American people into the cauldron of World War I.//%Author%Major General J.F.C. Fuller//%Who%British military historian//%Source%1941//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%The history of war is the history of powerful individuals willing to sacrifice thousands upon thousands of other people’s lives for personal gains.//%Author%Michael Rivero//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%I hate it when they say, “He gave his life for his country.” Nobody gives their life for anything. We steal the lives of these kids. We take it away from them. They don’t die for the honor and glory of their country. We kill them.//%Author%Admiral Gene LaRocque//%Who%U.S. Navy//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%The first casualty when war comes is truth.//%Author%Hiram W. Johnson//%Source%U.S. Senate, 1917//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Is there any means known to man more effective than war, assuming you want to alter the life of an entire people? At the end of the year, they came to the conclusion that there was no more effective means to that end known to man. So, then they raised question number two, and the question was, “How do we involve the United States in a war?”//%Author%Rene A. Wormser//%Source%Summarization of the Minutes of the meetings of the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace’s Board of Directors for 1908 and 1909, scrutinized by Miss Kathryn Casey, sent by Norman Dodd, Director of Research for the Reece Committee set up by Congress to investigate the tax-exempt foundations. Rene Wormser was the counsel for the Reece Committee who, after the Committee’s report was suppressed, wrote a book about the tax-exempt foundations and the Carnegie Endowment in which he noted//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%When Andrew Carnegie established The Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, he gave the managers of this fund a difficult task. How were they to go about promoting peace? They seem to have had no very clear idea until Dr. Nicholas Murray Butler … got excited about the peril of the Allies in World War I and decided that the best way to establish peace was to help get the United States into the War. To this end he began to use the Endowment funds.//%Author%Rene A. Wormser//%Source%Foundations: Their Power And Influence (1958)//%end% %start%%cat=CFR,NWO,War//%quote%The Council on Foreign Relations, another member of the international complex, financed by the Rockefeller and Carnegie Foundations, overwhelmingly propagandizes the globalist concept. This organization became virtually an agency of the government when World War II broke out. The Rockefeller Foundation had started and financed certain studies known as the War and Peace Studies, manned largely by associates of the Council; the State Department, in due course, took these studies over, retaining the major personnel which the Council on Foreign Relations had supplied.//%Author%Rene A. Wormser//%Who%Chief Counsel to the Reece Committee, which investigated the power and influence of Tax Exempt Foundations during the 1950’s//%Source%Foundations: Their Power and Influence (1958)//%end% %start%%cat=CFR,NWO//%quote%Those who formally rule take their signals and commands not from the electorate as a body, but from a small group of men (plus a few women). This group will be called the Establishment. It exists even though that existence is stoutly denied. It is one of the secrets of the American social order. … A second secret is the fact that the existence of the Establishment—the ruling class—is not supposed to be discussed.//%Author%Arthur S. Miller//%Who%George Washington University Professor of Law//%end% %start%%cat=CFR,NWO//%quote%The Council on Foreign Relations is “the establishment.” Not only does it have influence and power in key decision-making positions at the highest levels of government to apply pressure from above, but it also announces and uses individuals and groups to bring pressure from below, to justify the high level decisions for converting the U.S. from a sovereign Constitutional Republic into a servile member state of a one-world dictatorship.//%Author%Congressman John Rarick//%Source%1971//%end% %start%%cat=CFR,NWO//%quote%The ultimate aim of the Council on Foreign Relations … is … to create a one-world socialist system and make the United States an official part of it.//%Author%Dan Smoot//%Who%former supervising member of the FBI headquarters staff in the Washington Office and one of the first to research and publish on the activities of the Council on Foreign Relations//%Source%The Dan Smoot Report (20 July 1964)//%end% %start%%cat=CFR,NWO//%quote%There exists a shadowy government with its own Air Force, its own Navy, its own fundraising mechanism, and the ability to pursue its own ideas of national interest, free from all checks and balances, and free from the law itself.//%Author%Senator Daniel K. Inouye//%Source%at the Iran Contra Hearings, 1986//%end% %start%%cat=CFR,NWO//%quote%A careful examination of what is happening behind the scenes reveals that all of these interests are working in concert with the masters of the Kremlin in order to create what some refer to as a “New World Order.” Private organizations such as the Council on Foreign Relations, the Royal Institute of International Affairs, the Trilateral Commission, the Dartmouth Conference, the Aspen Institute for Humanistic Studies, the Atlantic Institute, and the Bilderberg Group serve to disseminate and to coordinate the plans for this so-called new world order in powerful business, financial, academic, and official circles.//%Author%Senator Jesse Helms//%Source%speech to the Senate, 1987//%end% %start%%cat=CFR,NWO//%quote%There is a de facto “secret government” operating nationally and internationally and involved in the highest circles of the U.S. government, exercising an impact over domestic policies and economics ranging between extreme influence to, at times, outright control. This extreme influence to outright control naturally includes the Presidency. The de facto “secret government,” much of whose intellectual—and financial—muscle are to be found in the New York office of the CFR, the great tax-free foundations, and certain international firms and corporations.//%Author%Mike Culbert//%Source%in Independent-Gazette (Richmond, California, 27 June 1974), in reference to his discussions with Charles Colson (a member of Nixon’s cabinet) on the almost total control of U.S. presidents by the outside forces.//%end% %start%%cat=CFR,NWO//%quote%You know, by the time you become the leader of a country, someone else makes all the decisions. … You may find you can get away with virtual presidents, virtual prime ministers, virtual everything.//%Author%Bill Clinton//%Source%1998//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%Every Republican candidate for President since 1936 has been nominated by the Chase National Bank.//%Author%Robert Taft//%Source%after his defeat at the 1952 Republican convention//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%We face the delicate question of the diplomatic fencing to be done so as to be sure Japan is put into the wrong and makes the first bad move. … The question was how we should maneuver them [the Japanese] into the position of firing the first shot.//%Author%Henry Stimson//%Who%U.S. Secretary of War//%Source%personal diary entries after meetings with President Roosevelt, 1941//%end% %start%%cat=NWO,War//%quote%When the news first came that Japan had attacked us my first feeling was of relief that … a crisis had come in a way which would unite all our people. This continued to be my dominant feeling in spite of the news of catastrophes which quickly developed.//%Author%Henry Stimson//%Who%U.S. Secretary of War//%Source%Statement to the Joint Congressional Committee on the Investigation of the Pearl Harbor Attack, 1946//%end% %start%%cat=NWOWar.//%quote%The Pearl Harbor of the 21st century took place today.//%Author%George W. Bush//%Source%in “America’s Chaotic Road to War,” Washington Post (Sunday, 27 Jan. 2002), Page A01//%end% %start%%cat=NWO,Peace,War//%quote%No triumph of peace can equal the armed triumph of war.//%Author%Theodore Roosevelt//%end% %start%%cat=NWO,War//%quote%In strict confidence … I should welcome almost any war, for I think this country needs one.//%Author%Theodore Roosevelt//%Source%speaking in 1897//%end% %start%%cat=CFR,NWO//%quote%The Rockefeller Foundation and the Council on Foreign Relations … intend to prevent, if they can, a repetition of what they call in the vernacular “the debunking journalistic campaign following World War I.” Translated into precise English, this means that the Foundation and the Council do not want journalists or any other persons to examine too closely and criticize too freely the official propaganda and official statements relative to “our basic aims and activities” during World War II. In short, they hope that, among other things, the policies and measures of Franklin D. Roosevelt will escape in the coming years the critical analysis, evaluation and exposition that befell the policies and measures of Woodrow Wilson and the Entente Allies after World War I.//%Author%Charles Austin Beard//%Who%Professor at Columbia University//%Source%in Saturday Evening Post (1947)//%end% %start%%cat=CFR,NWO//%quote%A clique of US industrialists is hell-bent to bring a fascist state to supplant our democratic government and is working closely with the fascist regime in Germany and Italy. I have had plenty of opportunity in my post in Berlin to witness how close some of our American ruling families are to the Nazi regime. … Certain American industrialists had a great deal to do with bringing fascist regimes into being in both Germany and Italy. They extended aid to help Fascism occupy the seat of power, and they are helping to keep it there.//%Author%William E. Dodd//%Who%U.S. Ambassador to Germany//%Source%quoted in Facts and Fascism, by George Seldes, and Trading with the Enemy, by Charles Higham, 1937//%end% %start%%cat=Communism,NWO//%quote%There is no doubt that America is now the prime target of international communism.//%Author%J. Edgar Hoover//%Source%Masters of Deceit (1958)//%end% %start%%cat=Education,NWO//%quote%We need a program of psychosurgery for political control of our society. The purpose is physical control of the mind. Everyone who deviates from the given norm can be surgically mutilated. ... The individual may think that the most important reality is his own existence, but this is only his personal point of view. This lacks historical perspective. Man does not have the right to develop his own mind. This kind of liberal orientation has great appeal. We must electronically control the brain. Someday armies and generals will be controlled by electric stimulation of the brain.//%Author%Dr. Jose Delgado//%Who%Director of Neuropsychiatry at Yale Medical School//%Source%Congressional Record, vol. 118, No. 26 (1974)//%end% %start%%cat=NWO//%quote%If you are afraid to speak against tyranny, then you are already a slave.//%Author%John “Birdman” Bryant//%Who%self labeled as “The World’s Most Controversial Author”//%end% %start%%cat=Education,NWO//%quote%Socialism is precisely the religion that must overwhelm Christianity. … In the new order, Socialism will triumph by first capturing the culture via infiltration of schools, universities, churches and the media by transforming the consciousness of society.//%Author%Antonio Gramsci//%Who%Italian communist and “class warrior”//%Source%1915//%end% %start%%cat=Education,NWO//%quote%I think the most important factor moving us toward a secular society has been the educational factor. Our schools may not teach Johnny to read properly, but the fact that Johnny is in school until he is 16 tends to lead toward the elimination of religious superstition. The average high school child acquires a high school education, and this militates against Adam and Eve and all other myths of alleged history. When I was one of the editors of The Nation in the twenties, I wrote an editorial explaining that golf and intelligence were the two primary reasons that men did not attend church. Perhaps today I would say golf and a high school diploma.//%Author%Paul Blanchard//%Source%The Humanist (1976)//%end% %start%%cat=Education,NWO//%quote%We must win the common people in every corner. This will be obtained chiefly by means of the schools; and by open, hearty behavior, show condescension, popularity, and toleration of their prejudices, which we shall at leisure root out and dispel.//%Author%Adam Weishaupt//%Source%quoted in John Robinson’s Proofs of a Conspiracy, 1795, reprinted by Western Islands, Boston, 1967, p. 111//%end% %start%%cat=Education,NWO//%quote%I want to make one thing clear. This war against our constitution is not being fought way off in Madagascar or in Mandalay. It is being fought here—in our schools, our colleges, our churches, our women’s clubs. It is being fought with our money, channeled through the State Department. It is being fought twenty-four hours a day—while we remain asleep. How many of you Senators know what the UN is doing to change the teaching of the children in your own home town? The UN is at work there, every day and night, changing the teachers, changing the teaching materials, changing the very words and tones—changing all the essential ideas which we imagine our schools are teaching to our young folks. How in the name of Heaven are we to sit here, approve these programs, appropriate our own people’s money—for such outrageous “orientation” of our own children, and of the men and women who teach our children, in this Nation’s schools?//%Author%Senator William Jenner//%Source%Congressional Record (1952)//%end% %start%%cat=Education,NWO//%quote%World dictatorship can be established only when the victory of socialism has been achieved in certain countries or groups of countries … [and] when these federation of republics have finally grown into a world union of Soviet Socialist Republics uniting the whole of mankind under the hegemony of the international proletariat organized as a state.//%Author%Joseph Stalin//%Source%1936//%end% %start%%cat=Education,NWO//%quote%Thus far of the leadership of the National Council of Churches of Christ in America, we have found over 100 persons in leadership capacity with either communist-front records or records of service to communist causes. The aggregate affiliations of the leadership, instead of being in the hundreds as first indicated, is now, according to the latest count, into the thousands, and we have yet to complete our check, which would certainly suggest, on the basis of authoritative sources of this committee, that the statement that there is infiltration of fellow travelers in churches and educational institutions is a complete understatement.//%Author%Richard Arens//%Who%Staff Director of the House Committee on Un-American Activities//%Source%“Issues Presented by the Air Reserve Training Manual” (Hearings), House Committee on Un-American Activities, Congressional Record (1960)//%end% %start%%cat=Education,NWO//%quote%The head of the powerful Jesuit Order (Father Pedro Arrupe) charged today (Sept. 27) that atheism constitutes a conspiracy that has infiltrated even the Roman Catholic Church and virtually controls international organizations, finance, and mass communications. … [Father Pedro Arrupe said that] “the new godless society operates in an extremely efficient manner, at least in its higher levels of leadership. It makes use of every possible means at its disposal, be they scientific, technical, social, or economic. It follows a perfectly mapped-out strategy. It holds almost complete sway in international organizations, in financial circles, in the field of mass communications: press, cinema, radio, and television.” … Father Arrupe, as head of the 36,000-member Jesuit Order, is considered to be one of the half-dozen most influential churchmen in the world, as indicated by his informal title of “Black Pope.”//%Author%Robert Doty//%Source%New York Times (1965)//%end% %start%%cat=NWO,Religion//%quote%Long before I was ordained a priest, I knew that my church was the most implacable enemy of this republic. My professors … had been unanimous in telling me that the principles and laws of the Church of Rome were absolutely antagonistic to the principles which are the foundation stones of the Constitution of the United States of America.//%Author%Charles Chiniquy//%Who%Ex-Catholic Priest//%Source%Fifty Years in the Church of Rome (Chick Publications), p. 283//%end% %start%%cat=NWO,Religion//%quote%Nothing is plainer than that, if the principles of the church of Rome prevail here, our Constitution would fall. The two cannot exist together. They are in open and direct antagonism with the fundamental theory of our government and of all popular government everywhere.//%Author%Richard Thompson//%Source%The Papacy and the Civil Power, in Fifty Years in the Church of Rome (Chick Publications), p. 285//%end% by: zzzEducation NWO

© 1998-2005 Liberty-Tree.ca